Home

"user manual"

Contents

1. l Al al ona P ow P g MTS E To check the model 43 f 3 fa A O number of the connectable 13 18 18 13 er PLC refer to Section 1 3 E 3 ha manuel red BU E i I EHL Le b HEL 3 b a e gt g Expansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board adapter adapter adapter adapter oar For a detailed aes description of wiring Analog data refer to Chapter 3 Inverter etc eZ For a detailed description Specialdeviees e 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 Output mode Transfer direction For a detailed description switching 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer to a 4y i Output setting data 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 Section 4 8 Error status Ath adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to determine the entire system D 3 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt dav avr nexs O 1d avenexa FTI dav var nex4 dav dav vononasu gid G or avenexy TT 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 Outline 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog output using 4DA ADP follo
2. lo0000 o000000000 lo oo 00 lo000000000 lo 00 00 lo000000000 loo 000 o000000000 pp E 4th 3rd 2nd 1st pee adapter adapter adapter adapter 4 Analog data A Thermocouple temperature sensor type K or J AAA Temperature measurement Transfer direction 1st adapter Setting of temperature unit gt 2nd adapter Switching of types between type K and type J Setting of number of averaging time 3rd adapter 4th adapter Special devices M D8260 to M D8269 M D8270 to M D8279 M D8280 to M D8289 M D8290 to M D8299 Up to 4 units of TC ADP can be connected to the PLC including other analog special adapters The thermocouple types K and J can be connected However it s impossible to use both types K and J A D conversion data will be automatically written in the special data register of the FX3U FX3UC Series Number of connectable units To check the model number of the connectable PLC refer to Section 1 3 taavenexs FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O gt o d For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 91 OWy N X4 qy For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 uoyonsul did 88 ON4 For a detailed description of a basic program refer to
3. Set item Setting Remarks Reference ee It cannot be shorter than operation Subsection Sampling time Ts 1 to 32767 ms cycle 3 21 r 0 Forward operation ar uii bitO 1 Backward operation Operation direction 0 Input variation alarm is invalid bit1 Sp 1 Input variation alarm is valid 0 Output variation alarm is invalid Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at bit2 ae 1 Output variation alarm is valid same time bit3 Not available Operation 0 Auto tuning is not executed Subsection i setting ACT Pit4 1 Auto tuning is executed 3 2 2 0 Upper and lower limits of output F value are not valid Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at bit5 oe 1 Upper and lower limits of output same time value are valid 0 Step response method bit6 1 Limit cycle method Select auto tuning mode bit7 to bit15 Not available When 0 is set input filter is not Subsection 2 Input filter constant a 0 to 99 provided 3 2 3 3 Proportional gain KP 1 to 32767 cr aus usenet 0 to 32767 x 100 ms pone it is handled as oo ea e isis 0 to 100 a set differential gain is era De a 0 to 32767 x 10 ms ea is set differential is not ae eel 7 These devices are occupied for internal processing of PID operation Do not change data ES 19 G 7 dady la avt nexa FT aav varnexa O aav ave nexs O TI gt a d 88 ONS 3L AYY NEXA uonon
4. gt Sampling time TS Alarm flag bitO bit1 2 23 T y gt E 23 A a x gt T When the output variation CS3 1 bit 2 is set to 1 x 4 2 Variation ES 5 bY is El vu 8 F 4 Variation a A 5 gt Y 83 TU U 5 IA Time T 2 Sampling time TS al Alarm flag gs bit2 bit3 When the preset input output variation is exceeded Each bit of 24 alarm flags turns ON immediately after PID instruction execution G 17 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 Auto Tuning This chapter describes the auto tuning function of PID instruction The auto tuning function will automatically set the important constants such as the proportional gain and the integral time to ensure optimum PID control There are two auto tuning methods limit cycle method and step response method 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 1 1 Parameters set in auto tuning of limit cycle method Parameter Setting position Proportional gain KP 3 Integral time TI 4 Differential time TD 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 1 2 Auto tuning procedure 1 Setting the forward or backward operation
5. Error Error description Action code 6730 Incorrect sampling time Ts Ts lt 0 Incorrect input filter constant 6132 a lt 0 or 100 lt a iS lt PID operation is stopped gt 6733 Incorrect proportional gain KP KP lt 0 A data error has occurred in the set value in a control parameter 6734 Incorrect integral time T1 TI lt 0 or in the middle of PID operation Check the parameters 6735 Incorrect derivative gain KD KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD 6736 Incorrect derivative time TD TD lt 0 lt Auto tuning is continued gt 6740 Sampling time TS lt Operation cycle The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time operation cycle 6742 Variation of measured value exceeds limit APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV 6743 Deviation exceeds limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV 6744 Integral result exceeds limit ae Out of range from 32768 to 32767 lt PID operation is continued gt The operation is continued with each parameter set to the 6745 tT value exceeds limit due to derivative gain maximum or minimum value D 6746 Derivative result exceeds limit Out of range from 32768 to 32767 6747 PID operation result exceeds limit Out of range from 32768 to 32767 rae __ lt Output upper limit value and output lower limit value are 6748 dean uppe rlimit set Yale lt PID output lower ln exchanged for each other gt PID operation is cont
6. RUN XO Tem data X0 T 1 2 3 TO Clearance of data history pulse H3300 U1 GO monitor MOV E M8000 Cig FNC 12 K100 U1 G198 novi 100 vor 00 FNC 12 Hooor Ju1 G199 MOV B porarily stop of history 01 FNC 12 HOFOO U1 G199 Novi Fo unco FNC 12 H0000 U1 G199 MOV E H0000 unto FNC 16 use200 D100 K100 BMOV FNC 16 NO A unG1900 D200 K100 FNC 16 NS IS fJungasooj D300 K100 FNC 16 y1 G4300 D400 K100 BMOV Temporarily stop of data history X001 0 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified 2 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms The digital values set for channels 1 to 4 will be read out to DO to D3 Data history of all the channels will be erased Data history of all the channels will be temporarily stopped Temporary stoppage of data history will be canceled for all the channels Channel 1 history data 100th times of data sampling will be read out to D100 to D199 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 2 history data 100th times of data sampling will be read out to D200 to D299 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 3 history data 100th times of data sampling will be read out to D300 to D399 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 4 history data 100th times of data sampling will be read out to D400 to D499 The watchdog timer will
7. for the current input mode y Example To set the offset value of 1 V set 1 000 mV E gt For a detailed description of offset data refer to Subsection 5 4 14 a ES 4 Determine the gain data F Determine the analog input value so that the digital output value is equal to the gain reference x value of each input mode E The following table shows the gain reference value of each input mode Ba U pal Input mode Analog input range Gain standard value Initial value G U 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 16000 5000mV 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 2000 5000mV Be On 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 16000 20000uA gs 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 4000 2000014 6 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 2000044 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 2000014 Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode and set the analog input value in uA for the current input mode Example To set the gain value of 3 V set 3000 mV gt For a detailed description of gain data refer to Subsection 5 4 14 B 49 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics 5 Greate a sequence program To change the input characteristics write the offset data BFM 41 to 44 and the gain data BFM 51 to 54 in the sequence program and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 21 for t
8. FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications Item z o Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Thermocouple type K or J mput signal JIS C 1602 1995 Rated temperature Type K 100 C to 1000 C Type K 148 F to 1832 F range Type J 100 C to 600 C Type J 148 F to 1112 F Type K 1000 to 10000 Type K 1480 to 18320 Digital output Type J 1000 to 6000 Type J 1480 to 11120 Type K 0 4 C Type K 0 72 F Resolution Type J 0 3 C Type J 0 54 F Total accuracy 0 5 full scale 1 C A D conversion time Input characteristics 200us The data will be updated at every scan time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section2 4 e Type K A E 1000 O I i NES cane 100 C q hol 99 1000 C a en 1000 I 1100 eType J 6100 nnneeeeeeee eee 6000 5 111 20 l rol 1 Phy ok I 1x9 5o t aS a big Ean 100 C 0 E 148 F 0 sor 600 C Su 11120F for ac A A 1480 LOZ 100 o l SS 1660 Insulation method The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog input area Channels ar
9. 5 3 2 O D lt fe S o a S N Pos D 2 o 3 O D o 7 D o 2 o gt Temperature sensor input e Platinum resistance European terminal block thermometer sensor Pt100 FX3U 4AD PT ADP 1 FX3u 232 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3U 422 BD FX3U USB BD or FX3u CNV BD is needed to connect the special adapters SW9 uowwog dvr onexs WW iaave nexs FT dav varnexy O aav avr nexs O ddv day uononysu did Q oLavr nexa TMI 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products 3 1 FX3U Series PLC 3 1 2 5 2 O 0 e Q oO 9 lo q 6 N ESE O Ko Q Cc S 3 j EY T 8 0 ol N oo O 2 Q i Connection of special function blocks FX3u Series Sy n e i 1 1 A ee y y Special function block for FX2N and FXON a El and represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual attached to your PLC gt Refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Terminal block To connect the special adapters fs or the expansion boards E E refer to the previous page Analog input e Flowmeter e Pressu
10. G 20 4 2 Step Response MethOd ccooocooocoooccccccccnoncncnnncnnnnnononnnnnncnnnnn nr nnnnnncnnnnnn neret nrrnnnrnnnnnn nr rrnnnnnnnnnennos G 21 4 2 1 Parameters to be set by auto tuning step response method ooococcccccnnnonccccccnconanonccnnnnananccnnos G 21 4 2 2 Auto TUNING PrOCE MUMS moi bd G 21 4 2 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control step response methoad G 22 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning Execution 0 ccccccceeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceaeeeeesnaeeeeseneeeeeseneeeetees G 22 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method G 23 5 1 Example System and operation ccccccceceecceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeecaeeceeseaeeseseeeeeeseneeeessneees G 23 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control cc ssseeeeeeees G 24 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesneeees G 26 6 Troubleshooting G 28 6 1 Error Godes inenen ni a a a eee G 28 A O aeasseesGearscsesasidsdsacaas i Revised HiStO Vicodin ss i sataan Enp net ceccecebesccciececedeczsdias ceeds caeeadenesvasaneteciecectecnegdecadaneassiasise ii _ 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 12 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common ltems 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 Introduction
11. FX3u FX3uc Series PLC on P a aa ES To check the model terere number of the connectable PLC refer to Section 1 3 ooooolooo0000000 lo9000 lo000000000 OOOO norco Los e cooolocacosoano OOOO Cc a q oF 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed Analog data Rte description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 A For a detailed description A Special devices of special devices refer to Transfer direction 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 Chapter 4 Switching o m CEA led descripti eSwitching of input mode 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 For a detailed description f a basi fert Setting of number a 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 of a basic program refer 10 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to determine the entire system of averaging time C 3 ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt id avenex4 PT aav varnexs UD aav ave nexs dav dav vononasu did G oravaa TT 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 Outlin
12. Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K sw UOLULOS gt When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous value and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in BFM 91 to 94 the system will judge that the channel data is changed abruptly The result of abrupt change detection will be written in BFM 27 as the abrupt change detection status data The abrupt change detection value setting range depends on the set input mode BFM 0 as shown in the following table dvr onexs Input mode BFM 0 C Set RaM Setting range Initial value ray Description value 5 w Voltage input 3 0 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 1 1032767 3200 2 Voltage input D 1 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 1104095 490 gt x lt Voltage input E 2 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 10000 1000 El 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 3 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 1 to 8191 800 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 1 to 2047 200 E Current input x 5 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 8191 800 E 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 5 53 Current input e 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 110 16383 1699 F Current input 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 1 10 4095 aug x Current input amp 8 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 20000 2000 5 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 ge 1 Cautions rega
13. sua UOWWOD This manual describes the analog products of the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC This chapter describes the analog control types and applications dvr onexs WW 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control For the FX Series there are 3 types of analog control Voltage current input voltage current output and temperature sensor input Select products optimum for the purpose of use FX3u Series PLC FX3UC Series PLC MISUBSA MESE a E a B z EVoltage current input EVoltage current E Temperature sensor control type output control type input control type la avt nexa FT dav varnexy O aav avr nexs O eFX3U 4AD ADP eFX3U 4DA ADP eFX3U 4AD TC ADP S eFX3UC 4AD eFX3U 4AD PT ADP Refer to Subsection Refer to Subsection Refer to Subsection F x S E gt 2 383 TU Thermocouple w Flowmeter Inverter etc platinum resistance 5 pressure sensor etc thermometer _3 sensor Ze es 2 AAA In addition to the above applications the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC can be used for various purposes A 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 1 1 Analog input control Input the voltage current signal from the flowmeter pressure sensor etc to the PLC to monitor the con
14. D8268 7 m 3800900086 Channel 1 output data set value error of the 1st adapter Channel 2 output data set value error of the 1st adapter Channel 3 output data set value error of the 1st adapter Channel 4 output data set value error of the 1st adapter EEPROM error of the 1st adapter Number of averaging time setting error of the 1st adapter PT ADP hardware error of the 1st adapter PT ADP communication data error of the 1st adapter E 19 aw onex4 DY sway uowwo5 gt x lt amp T gt z gt w U u 2s Cc A U T gt U TU 1d dWy N XW4 day dav O Sian TT uononsul did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 Programming 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code 4 8 Initial value K20 Numeric data type Decimal K When PT ADP is connected model code 20 will be stored in the special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the above special data registers to check whether PT ADP is connected or not 1 Example of program FNC224 D8269 k20 010 LD Example of Basic Program Checks the model code of the 1st analog special adapter Create an example of basic progra
15. gt Sa So IQ M iq 10V 0 Sai Se lt x gt AA 32000 PCE 32640 When the input mode is set to 6 16320 P 16000 q gt it 1 IiE Pix 180 p lt 20mA Q 1 lt i 20mA Sei avi Tal TN ome 16000 0 4mA 20mA The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 1V lt Gain Offset 43 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30MA 4 78 x number of selected channels The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms A 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 3 FX2Nc 4AD FX2NC 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range 1
16. 1 Introduction A 1 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog ContrOl ooooooooooccccccnnocoooonnnnnnnnncnnnnnonnnnononcnnnnnn nn nnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns A 1 1141 Analog INput Control isso cria t peanae alado elena oade e eia enla cial necia A 2 VAL ANO output CO i A 2 1 1 3 Temperature sensor input CONtTOL oooooicccccnnnnnoccccccncnoncncnnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnann nn nrnna nnnm mEnE A 3 2 Description of Analog Products A 4 2 1 Various Types of Analog ProductS oooooccccnocicocccooccnnncccnnonononononccnnnnnononnnnnncnnnnnn nro nnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnns A 4 Zi Special adapter mma ain ia A A 4 2 1 2 Special fN IOM D OCK e naciona inn ces ENEE nek anita A 5 2 2 List of Analog Product Models ccc ccceececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeceaaeeeesnneeesseaeeeeesnueeeeseneeeees A 6 22 Special dali aro ceda A 6 2 2 2 Special function bIOCk si ie eee einer nie eevee de A 7 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products A 9 3 1 EX3U Series Plica keen AAA GK Ae Re E ne AAS As e A 9 3 1 1 Connection of special adapters ccccccceececceececeeeeeeaeee cee iia ie a i E ia deanei a pieier A 9 3 1 2 Connection of special function DIOCKS ooooooccnnnnncccccnnnnccccccnccnccnnncnnnnnonann nn cnn nnnnn o nn nnn nn nnn nn cnc A 10 3 2 gt FX3UG Series PG id del A 11 3 2 1 Connection of special adapter ooooccoccccnnncccnnonnnonocnnnnonnncnnn a corn A 11 3 2 2 Connection of special function DIOCKS
17. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th parce ee D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 input data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 input data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 input data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 input data The A D converted immediate data or the averaged data data average conforming to the specified number of averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the input data gt For a detailed description of the number of averaging time refer to Section 4 5 1 Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the current input data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool Example of pro M8000 Normally ON gram MOV MOV D100 D101 Stores the channel 1 input data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 Stores the channel 2 input data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101 D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter set value or in PID instruction C 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 5 Number of Averaging Time 4 5 Number of Averaging Time 5 S Setting range 1 to 4095 g Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K B If the number of averaging time is set for 4
18. 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If 4AD ADP is connected special devices will be assigned as shown in the following table R Read W Write i Device number E ESE Description Attribute NERD device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th ence M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R W M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R W Section M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 R W 4 3 relay M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 R W M8264 to M8274 to M8284 to M8294 to Unused Do not use i i M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 input data R D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 input data R Section D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 input data R 4 4 D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 input data R Number of averaging time for Dees Deere eZee D9294 channel 1 Setting range 1 to 4095 RW Special D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Number of averaging time for R W data channel 2 Setting range 1 to 4095 Section register Number of averaging time for 4 5 D8266 D926 BOERE D8236 channel 3 Setting range 1 to 4095 PAN Number of averaging time for id peer id csi channel 4 Setting range 1 to 4095 RIN D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W Pri D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 1 R p 4 3 Switching of Input Mode Turn on off the s
19. 9V to 10V 17mA to 30mA c Absolute maximum 15V 30mA input y Digital output With sign 16bits binary With sign 15bits binary E gt og 0 32mV 20V 64 000 1 25uA 40mA 32 000 P Resolution E 2 5mV 20V 8 000 5 00uA 40mA 8 000 3 Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C D Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 5 200uA for full scale of 40mA Overall acc r c 0 3 60mV for full scale of 20V Same 200uA when input is 4mA to 20mA x y e Ambient temperature 0 C 55 C e Ambient temperature 0 C 55 C E 0 5 100mV for full scale of 20V 1 4001A for full scale of 40mA g Same 400uA when input is 4mA to 20mA l TU Time required for 500us x number of selected channels A D conversion If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s 5ms x number of selected channels E The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC z Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the analog input area from the power supply unit E Channels are not insulated from each other 5 53 Number of ue 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 3 occupied points 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the F offset gain cannot be adjusted x 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition E 1V lt Gain Offset F gt 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 8
20. D FX3u BD Analog output elnverter etc European terminal block FX3u 4DA ADP la avt nexa FT dav varnexy O aav avr nexs O ho o L S D Cc fo 8 o O iS 1 o o E o F jo T T g zx 0 oa ES n Temperature sensor g gt input 1 2 European terminal block B9 v eThermocouple o types K and J gt G o FX3u 4AD TC ADP A U 5 5 E 2 gs Temperature sensor input ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 European terminal block FX3u 4AD PT ADP 4 FX3u 232 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3U 422 BD FX3U USB BD or FX3U CNV BD is needed to connect the special adapters A 11 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC 3 2 2 Connection of special function blocks Al B a and D represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual attached to your PLC gt Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3uc Series E REN el ln ar E All Ela REN El s PIERI 8 FX3uc 4AD European terminal block Analog input eFlowmeter ePressure sensor eSignal converter et
21. FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 5 Number of Averaging Time 4 5 Number of Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 z Initial value K1 5 Numeric data type Decimal K If the number of averaging time is set for PT ADP the averaged temperature measurement data will be B stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The number of x averaging time can be set for each channel 5 Set the number of averaging time in the following special data registers 3 Special data register AN Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Number of averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Number of averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Number of averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Number of averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding number of averaging time setting e If the number of averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register ddv var nexs J ddv avr nexs O If the number of averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set number of averaging time and the obtained average value will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register a e After turning the PLC
22. If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of PLC e Wiring e Special devices e Programs e Error status 6 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3UCc 32MT LT The version number should be 1 20 or later gt For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power 4AD ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of 4AD ADP is on 2 Analog input line Use the 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from the other motive power lines or inductive lines 3 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to shortcircuit the line between the VL terminal and the terminal L channel number of the channel If the line is not shortcircuited data will not be converted into correct digital data gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 3 Special Device Check
23. The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible B 15 sw UOULOS gt Ovp ONEX dav iaave nexs FT dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav O Sion TI uoHOnsUl did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 4 Analog Data Reading 4 1 Procedure for Reading Out of Analog Data 4 Analog Data Reading This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary for readouts of the analog data by 4AD Follow the procedure below to confirm that the analog data can be properly read out 4 1 Procedure for Reading Out of Analog Data 1 Unit number check When special function units blocks such as 4AD are connected to the main unit FX3uc Series PLC unit numbers will be sequentially assigned to the connected units blocks starting from the unit block next to the main unit Check the unit number assigned to 4AD Unit number 0 Incorporated CC Link LT Unit number 1 Unit number 2 Unit number 3 Input output extension block Input output extension block FX3uc 32MT LT Special Special function block function block Special Main unit function unit 2 Input mode BFM 0 setting Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected set the input mode BFM 0 for each channel Use the hexadecimal numbers for input mode setting Set the digit of the corresponding ch
24. etc is incorporated The peak disconnection detection function is incorporated The CT sensor is needed 4 To connect this block to the FX3uc Series PLC either FX2NC CNV IF or FX3uc 1PS 5V is needed 2 Refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding product A 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 1 FX3U Series PLC 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products This section shows drawings to describe the configuration of analog units for the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 3 1 FX3uU Series PLC 3 1 1 Connection of special adapters FX3u Series 4 To connect the special function blocks A refer to the next page H A B and represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual attached to your PLC gt Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Analog input e Flowmeter e Pressure sensor e Signal converter etc European terminal block 66660 mu dl Ol Ol ml ij FX3u BD FX3u 4AD ADP Analog output e Inverter etc European terminal block o FX3u 4DA ADP Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple types K and J European terminal block
25. 125 Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification z 2 E Setting range 0 to 7992 5 Initial value at delivery K200 Dx Numeric data type Decimal K a2 If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM 125 the minimum peak value BFM 101 to F 104 and the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 will be automatically transferred to the specified x data registers 8 points registers starting from the first data register specified E Only when the peak value is updated data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this i 3 reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be ES shortened gt For a detailed description of the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the maximum peak G value BFM 111 to 114 refer to Subsection 5 4 19 z 1 If BFM 125 K200 initial value EH Data will be transferred to D200 to D207 8 points OS Specified data register Description a D200 Channel 1 minimum peak value BFM 101 D201 Channel 2 minimum peak value BFM 102 D202 Channel 3 minimum peak value BFM 103 D203 Channel 4 minimum peak value BFM 104 D204 Channel 1 maximum peak value BFM 111 D205 Channel 2 maximum peak value BFM 112 D206 Channel 3 maximum peak value BFM 113 D207 Channel 4 maximum peak value BFM 114 2 Caution regarding peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification e
26. 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of cautions regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 dav taave nexs FT dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav O Sian TI uononasu did 88 ONS B 31 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 9 BFM 26 Upper lower limit error status 1 Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H If channel data BFM 10 to 13 is out of the range set by the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 and the upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 the following operation will be performed e If channel data lt lower limit error set value The lower limit error bit will be turned on e If channel data gt upper limit error set value The upper limit error bit will be turned on For a detailed description of upper lower limit error status data resetting refer to Subsection 5 4 18 Assignment of each bit of BFM 26 The upper and lower limit error values of each channel are assigned as shown in the following table Bit No Channel number Description bO 44 Lower limit error value c b1 Upper limit error value b2 Lower limit error value SRA ch2 b3 Upper limit error value b4 Lower limit error value H ch3 b5 Upper limit error value b6 Lower limit error value
27. 2 Caution regarding use of abrupt change detection status data F e To use the abrupt change status data be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM x 22 E Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit a Turn the power off and on Turn on b2 of BFM 99 reset the abrupt change detection error status G Write H0000 in BFM 27 as the abrupt change detection status data E Even if abrupt change is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will continuously be updated 3 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 25 If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 127 the gs data in BFM 27 can be transferred to the specified data register Only when abrupt change is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting ON Valid Transfer from memory EEN oe A BFM 22 b2 0N BFM 22 b6 ON BFM 27 B 33 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 11 BFM 28 Over scale status 1 I
28. 3 mA lt Gain Offset lt 30 mA G 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode U 2 of g S B 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 Specifications 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 For 4AD there are two types of input characteristics voltage 10 to 10V and current 4 to 20mA 20 to 20mA input characteristics The input characteristics depend on the set input mode as described below For each input range there are 3 input modes 1 Voltage input characteristics 10 to 10V Input mode 0 to 2 Set input mode 0 Input type Voltage input Analog input range 10 to 10V Digital output range 32000 to 32000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 1 Input type Voltage input Analog input range 10 to 10V Digital output range 4000 to 4000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 2 Input type Voltage input analog direct indication Analog input range 10 to 10V Digital output range 10000 to 10000 Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value Digital value Digital value FLO qn 4080 10200 32000 4000 es 1000 i isa Bir 0 BER 120 i iSo MES Input Ea Input LIZA Input BE voltage 10V i voltage 10V 0 1 voltage 10
29. 6 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for 4AD ADP are correctly used 1 Switching of input mode Check that the special device for switching the input mode is correctly set Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode Turn on the device to set the input mode to the current input mode ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt 2 Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 3 Number of averaging time Check that the set number of averaging time is within the specified range The number of averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set number of averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 4 Error status Check that no error is detected on 4AD ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs gt For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 6 4 Program Check IM aav varnxs O aav ave nexs Check the following items for a program y 2 1 Clearing of error status at power on S When the power is turned off and then on again error status should be cleared the b6 and the b7 should be gt u turned off using the program 5 2 Check of storage devices F Check if different digital values are not stored in the same device in the other programs x E
30. Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 2 FX2Nc 4DA FX2NC 4DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch Analog output range 10V to 10V DC External load 2k to 1MQ OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 5000 or less Offset 5V to 5V 12 20mA to 20mA 13 Gain 4V to 20V 172 16mA to 32mA 13 Digital input With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary Resolution 5mV 20Vx1 4000 2014 A 20mAx1 1000 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for full scale of 20V 0 5 1001A for full scale of 20mA Same for input of 4mA to 20mA 0 to 55 C Ambient temperature 1 0 200mV for full scale of 20V 1 0 2001A for full scale of 20mA Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Reference Overall accuracy Does not include any load fluctuation Time required for D A conversion 2 1ms The number of selected c hannels will not affect this value Output characteristics Insulation method When the output mode is set to 0 Approx 2047 E 2000 Sei ahi ps Se See 10V When the output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 1 20mA 3 Pro y H mM D Y ta T J 2 cz Y Aas i E i 18 4 i2 4mA i lt o gt 1000 Digital input The photocoupler is used to insulate the analo g output area from the PLC e Th
31. FNC D8269 Yo07 of the 1st analog special LD adapter 4 8 Example of Basic Program Create the basic example program to output D A converted analog data The following program will set channel 1 to the voltage output mode and channel 2 to current output mode and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D A conversion Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode 0 V to 10 V Sets the output holding function for channel 1 Sets the output mode of channel 2 to the current output mode 4 mA to 20 mA Cancels the output holding function for channel 2 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored in D100 for channel 1 FNC 12 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored D101 De in D101 for channel 2 Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D100 and D101 D 19 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt dav avr nexs O M dav var nex4 1d dWy NeXW4 day dav O Sian TI uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics 5 Changing of Output Characteristics Use scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 of the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC to change the output characteristics gt For a detailed description of scaling instruct
32. FX3u FX3uC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100 8310 HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN MODEL FX3U U ANALOG E MODEL CODE 09R619 JY997D16701A Effective July 2005 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
33. If the number of averaging time is out of the setting range the number of averaging time setting error b10 of BFM 29 will occur If the number of averaging time is set the data history function cannot be used B 26 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 3 BFM 6 to 9 Digital filter setting Setting range 0 to 1600 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K sw UOWUWUOD gt To use the digital filter for channel data BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 set the digital filter value in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 Ovp ONEXA gt For a detailed description of channel data update timing refer to Subsection 5 4 4 If the digital filter function is used the relation between the analog input value and the set digital filter value or the digital output value channel data will be as follows Digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 gt Fluctuation of analog signal fluctuation width less than 10 times of sampling If the fluctuation of the analog signal input value is less than the set digital filter value the analog input value will be converted into a stabilized digital output value and stored in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 Digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 lt Fluctua
34. Input output Special Special extension Special function block function block block function unit Outline of buffer memory The analog signals input into 4AD will be converted into digital values and then stored in the buffer memory incorporated in 4AD To switch the input mode between voltage input and current input or to adjust the offset or gain numeric data will be sent from the main unit and written set in the buffer memory of 4AD To read write data from into the buffer memory of 4AD the buffer memory can be directly specified using FROM TO instruction or application instruction Using this function sequence programs can be easily created FXauc Series PLC FX3uc 4AD BFM direct FX3uc 4AD specification e TO instruction e BFM direct specification e TO instruction Sequence program A e BFM direct specification e FROM AID A D instruction conversion conversion Analog data e BFM direct specification e FROM instruction Analog data Flowmeter pressure sensor etc 1 Since the buffer memory direct specification function ULAGL can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or destination area of the application command programs can be efficiently created gt For a detailed description of buffer memory reading writing refer to Section 5 2 gt For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 6 4 B
35. Ld QYY NEX4 day L AYY NEXA av d uononisu gid G 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 TC ADP hardware error b6 1 2 Description of error TC ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to TC ADP Also check that TC ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 TC ADP communication data error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between TC ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that TC ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office F 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 aw onex4 DY sway uowwog gt FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 mM aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O day Ld QYY NEX4 F 91 OWy N X4 gt a d uononsul did 88 ON4 Foreword This manual describes the control methods for using the PID instruction in combination with analog products and should be read and understood before attempting to
36. Manual Hardware Edition iaave nexs FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O Supplied with gt is Manual type Document productor Description ES number separately supplied F FX3U Series PLC x This manual describes various items necessary for the amp FX3U Series Supplied with p 8 HARDWARE MANUAL JY997D18801 product hardware of the FX3U Series PLC main unit such as ya specifications wiring and installation ge This manual describes various items necessary for the G FX3u Series User s Manual Separately FX3U Series PLC main unit and various items for the Pe JY997D16501 Ses Gd H Hardware Edition supplied hardware such as extension specifications wiring and 3 installation FX3UC Series PLC Za The input output specifications and the wiring and 8 installation methods for the FX3uc PLC are excerpted a MANUAL JY997D12701 leg ven from the User s Manual for FX3uc Series for Hardware P For details refer to the User s Manual for FX3uc Series for Hardware Provides detailed information on the hardware such as dices A SManual JY997D11601 til the input output specifications and the detailed wiring Hareware Egtion supple installation and maintenance methods for the FX3uc PLC FX3u FX3uc Series PLC FX3u FX3UC Series Programming Manual Basic JY997D16601 8 Applied Instruction Edition Separately This manual describes the basic and application supplied commands necessary for the FX3U FX3uc Series
37. Occupied points Target value SV The target value SV is set PID instruction does not change the settings Caution on using the auto tuning limit cycle method If the target value for auto tuning is different from the target value in the PID control it is necessary to set a value to which a bias value is added and then store the actual target value when the auto tuning flag turns OFF Measured value PV This is the input value of the PID operation Parameter 1 2 Auto tuning in the limit cycle Twenty nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in Auto tuning in the step response method a Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 15 are something other than 0 Twenty five devices are occupied from the head device specified in CSs b Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 15 are 0 Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in Sa 29 25 20 T Output value MV 1 2 3 PID control normal processing The user sets the initial output value before driving the instruction After that the operation result is stored Auto tuning in the limit cycle method The ULV or LLV value is automatically output during auto tuning The specified MV value is output when auto tuning is finished Auto tuning in the step response method The user sets the step output value before driving the instruction The MV value is not change
38. bit 0 Select the PID control direction forward or backward e Inthe auto tuning limit cycle method It is necessary to set the PID control direction forward or backward of auto tuning e Inthe auto tuning step response method Without regard to the setting of the PID control direction forward or backward the direction is automatically set when auto tuning is completed Forward operation 1 bit0 0 As the measured value PV becomes larger than the target value SV the output MV increases For example cooling is a forward operation lt Cooling gt Measured value PV Temperature Target value SV gt Time Backward operation 1 bit0 1 As the measured value PV becomes smaller than the target value SV the output MV increases For example heating is a backward operation lt Heating gt atl AAA Target value SV Measured value PV Temperature Time Relationship between the forward backward operation and the output MV measured value PV and target value SV The relationship is as follows A Target value SV Forward operation Backward operation Output MV Measured value PV FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 2 Alarm setting for input variation and output variation CS3 1 bit 1 and bit 2 eN Setting range OFF ON 3 The input va
39. gt ch4 b7 Upper limit error value b8 to b15 Not used Cautions regarding use of upper lower limit error status data e To use the upper lower limit error status data be sure to turn on the upper lower limit detection function b1 of BFM 22 e Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Turn on b0 or b1 of BFM 99 to reset the upper lower limit error status Write H0000 in BFM 26 as the upper lower limit error status data e Even if an error is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will continuously be updated Upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 If the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 126 the data in BFM 26 can be transferred to the specified data register Only when the upper lower error is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer to data register specification ON Valid Transfer from buffer memory BFM 126 KO BFM 22 b1 0N BFM 22 b5 ON BFM 26 B 32 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD
40. gt If data is not stored properly refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting B 50 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 1 Program That Uses Number of Averaging Time 7 Examples of Practical Programs Use the functions incorporated in 4AD to create practical programs This chapter describes the examples of practical programs Program that uses the number of averaging time Program that uses convenient functions e Program that uses the data history function e Program that initializes 4AD to the factory default status Slay UOLULOS gt dvr onexs 7 1 Program That Uses Number of Averaging Time This section describes a program that uses the number of analog data averaging time input to 4AD or the digital filter function of 4AD 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions 1 System configuration 4AD unit No 1 should be connected to the main unit 2 Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V gt 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0 to 16000 IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O E gt 3 Number of averaging time E For channels 1 through 4 the number of averaging time should be set to 10 3 4 Digital filter function a For channels 1 through 4 the d
41. ooooocccnnniccccninoccccccnccnccnononcnnnnnnno nn cnnnnnnn o nn nnn nn cnn nnncnnnnno A 12 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications A 13 4 1 AnalogINput iomolititias ai a A 13 411 EX3UAAD AD Pisa ada A 13 A 2 EXBUCAAD ci isis A 14 AALS EXZNCAAD ti ias A 15 4 14 PONS AD ic ai a E A 16 EVITE AD leeis A 17 4 1 6 PON ADociiacion is A o oh Seeded ia A 18 4 2Analog QU td pl ad ds A 19 4 24 EXGUADACAD O RARA donee A 19 4 22 FXONC 4 DA iio II A otrora A 20 AZRINERZN ADA A dil Rda A 21 4 24 PRONGZDA o a tt A 22 4 3 Analog Input Output Mixture eccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeceaeeeeesaeeeesecaeeeeseneeetesaees A 23 IAN veces sl een A de ee ee aed i eee sli A 23 BD KON Acido ao E E E ETE RA A 25 4 4 Temperature Sensor INPUt ooooocoooccnncccnnnonnnnnncnnnooonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss A 26 4 4 1 FX3U 4AD PT ADP to ees A 26 4 42 FX3U 4AD TC ADP union ela A 27 AA EX2NAADP Ti idas A 28 LAA EX2NAAD Cin Pas A 29 44 5 EX2N BA Di a A 30 IAN dia A 31 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment A 32 5 1 How to Use Various Manuals oooonccnicicicinicocononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn A 32 5 2 Description of Related Manuals cccccsccceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeesceaeeeeecueeeeeseeeeseseeeeeeeneees A 33 5 2 1 Analog control Manual s sisien i aekin ii
42. 1 2 WRITE command ENG 20 F Addition Unit number amp result Buffer memory number F Augend Addend ES 5 2 2 FROMI TO instruction conventional method iw 1 FROM instruction BFM Reading out data to PLC 23 Use FROM instruction to read out the data from the buffer memory gs In a sequence program use this instruction as follows READ command FNC78 k1 K10 D10 K1 FROM Number of transfer Unit number 4 data points Buffer memory number Transfer to register If the above program is created 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM 10 to the data register D10 2 TO instruction PLC Writing data into BFM Use TO instruction to write data in a buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows WRITE d comman FNC 79 a TO L amber of transfer Unit ambene pE points Buffer memory number Addend B 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method If the above program is created 1 point of data H3300 will be written in buffer memory BFM 0 of unit No 1 B 20 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 3 List of Buffer Memories BFM FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 List of Buffer Memories BFM 4AD incorporates the following buffer memories For a detailed description of buffe
43. 129 When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the error status data BFM 29 refer to Subsection 5 4 12 If BFM 129 K211 initial value Specified data register Description D211 Error status data in BFM 29 Caution regarding error status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify such a data register Be sure to turn on the error status data automatic transfer function b8 of BFM 22 The data set in BFM 129 will be retained in the EEPROM Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 44 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 26 BFM 197 Selection of cyclic data update function function for data history Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Use this function to update the data history is BFM 200 to 6999 Channel numbers are respectively assigned to 4 lower bits
44. 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method To read or write the buffer memory of 4AD use FROM TO instruction or the buffer memory direct specification function To use the buffer memory direct specification function however it is necessary to adopt the software compatible with the FX3uc Series PLC gt For a detailed description of the software compatible with the FX3uc Series PLC refer to Section 1 4 sw UOULOS gt dvr onexs 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification When directly specifying the buffer memory specify the following device in the source or destination area of the direct application command as follows U LNG E Enter a numeric value in Unit number 1 7 e Buffer memory number 0 6999 1 Example 1 If the following program is created the data in buffer memory BFM 10 of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data K10 and then the multiplication result will be read out to the data registers D10 D11 EAD command FNC 22 U1 G10 K10 D10 a nl Unit number i Multiplication result Buffer memory number Multiple IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O a 2s E 2 Example 2 5 If the following program is created write the data that the data register D20 is added to the data K10 in a buffer memory BFM 6 of unit
45. 2 Description of error PT ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to PT ADP Also check that PT ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 PT ADP communication data error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between PT ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that PT ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office E 23 awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt ddv var nexs J ddv avr nexs O day 1d dWy NeXW4 dav O Sian TI 88 ONS uononsul did FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check MEMO E 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input aw onex4 DY sway uowwo5 gt FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input IM cav varnexs O aav ave nexs O id dvp nex4 dady 91 OWy N X4 qy d uononisu ala G 88 ON4 Foreword This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation
46. 3 o Connect the 24V DC power supply line of 4DA ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 3 1 To Connect to the FX3u Series PLC B 1 To use the External power supply 2 To use 24V DC power of PLC x FX3u Series PLC 4DA ADP FX3u Series PLC a SUEDE Main unit Main unit 15V 15V 3 T gt 2 gt o g Terminal x Terminal ES block block T gt Class D Class D a 24V DC grounding grounding E Caution regarding connection of power supply line x E e Ground the terminal to the class D grounded power supply line 1000 or less together with the E grounding terminal of the PLC main unit 53 U 3 3 2 To Connect To the FX3uc Series PLC F ES 4DA ADP FX3uc Series PLC FX2nc Series PLC E Main unit Input extension a 15V block Ba U v Power T al Power Power crossover Qe connector connector oS connector Terminal block L Class D 24V DC grounding Caution regarding connection of power supply line For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC e Ground the terminal to the class D grounded power supply line 1000 or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit D 13 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 4 Analog Output Line 3 4 Analog Output Line The analog output
47. 4 Channels 1 to 4 NS BFM 71 to 74 BFM 81 to 84 Voltage input 0 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 32768 to 32767 32768 32767 Voltage input 1 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 arene RADIS ee 49935 Voltage input 2 Analog value direct indication mode 10200 to 10200 10200 10200 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 AOS a 19983 4 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 1 to 4095 1 4095 Current input 5 Analog value direct indication mode 3999 to 20400 3999 20400 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 Current input 6 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 16384 to 16383 16384 16383 Current input f 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 di 4098 4099 Current input 8 Analog value direct indication mode 20400 to 20400 20400 20400 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 1 Cautions regarding upper lower limit error setting e To use the set upper lower limit error data be sure to turn on the upper lower limit error detection function b1 of BFM 22 e To use the data addition function bO of BFM 22 together with this function be sure to add the addition data channels 1 to 4 BFM 61 to 64 to the upper lower limit values to be set In addition observe the data setting range B 38 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 17 BFM 91 to 94 Abrupt change detection value setting
48. 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 10 BFM 27 Abrupt change detection status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous value and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in BFM 91 to 94 the following operation will be performed Slay UOLULOS gt e If new value previous value gt abrupt change detection value The direction bit will be turned on dvr onexs e If previous value new value gt abrupt change detection value The direction bit will be turned on For a detailed description of abrupt change detection status data resetting refer to Subsection 5 4 18 1 Assignment of each bit of BFM 27 For the abrupt change detection function of each channel the and directions are assigned as shown in the following table IM aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O Bit No Channel number Description bO direction for abrupt change detection bt a direction for abrupt change detection b2 directionforabruptchange detection bs direction for abrupt change detection b CO Of direction for abrupt change detection CS g direction for abrupt change detection z b6 aid direction for abrupt change detection E b7 direction for abrupt change detection 53 b8 to b15 Not used E
49. 8 special function blocks can be connected Analog special function block FX3U Series PLC for FX2N and FXON dvr onexs WW MITSUBISHI gG n2opgnegonsnaenss og abagaggeseeeees FX3948M dos3il s Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected excluding the special adapters gt For a detailed description of system configuration refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC 2 FX3uc Series PLC Connect the special function block s to the right side of the FX3uc Series PLC In some cases FX2NC CNV IF or FX3uc 1PS 5V may be needed for connection e Up to 7 special function blocks can be connected la avt nexa FT dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O gt J FX3UC Analog special function block Ex3uc 1PS 5V Analog special function au Series PLC for FX3uc and FX2NC t block for FX2N and FXON F FX2NC CNV IF aa x 2 li E gt E iw 3 mz Ba 2 v Ja G U Up to 7 special function units blocks can be 2 2 connected excluding the special adapters 27 Select either FX3uc 1PS 5V or FX2NC CNV IF considering the current consumption of the components gt For a detailed description of system configuration refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC A 5 F
50. ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data A g 3 3 4 Programming F ee This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using 4DA ADP B 3 g 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data a U 1 The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to terminal block 2 If data is stored in the special devices the number of averaging time can be set and the output mode can C be specified y 3 The special devices special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are E assigned starting from the adapter nearest the main unit 5 For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 S sommun High speed cation i FX3u 4DA FX3u 4DA FX3u 4DA special FX3u 4DA m ADP ADP ADP adapter ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 2 2nd Special devices gt E 5 Special auxiliary relays TU M8260 to M8269 DIA CT Special data registers E D8260 to D8269 z 23 Special auxiliary 78 S E M8270 to M8279 gt DIA Ed Special data registers a D8270 to D8279 a D Sequence d program Special auxiliary 88 F M8280 to M8289 o PA lei o D8289 ES A gt Special auxiliary relays ra F M8290 to M8299 o palo DY Special data registers S U e The analog special adapter nearest the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on In this case
51. Abbreviations in This Manual 5 2 Description of Related Manuals FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual 1 Series and main unit Abbreviation generic name PLC FX Series PLC FX3U Series Generic name for the FX3u Series PLC Description Generic name for the FXo FXos FX1s FXon FX1N FX1 FX2 FX FX2N FX3U FX1NC FX2NC and FX3uc Series PLC FX3u Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3u Series PLC main unit FX3UC Series FX3uc Series PLC or main unit Abbreviation generic name Expansion board Expansion board Generic name for the FX3uc Series PLC Generic name for the FX3uc Series PLC main unit Only manuals in Japanese are available for there products 2 Expansion board and special adapter Description Generic name for communication expansion board and special adapter connec tion expansion board Communication expansion board Generic name for 232BD 422BD 485BD and USBBD 232BD FX3U 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX1N 232 BD 422BD FX3U422 BD FX2N 422 BD FX1N 422 BD gt s i sSOSOSOSCSCS S 485BD FX3U 485 BD FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD USBBD FX3u USB BD Special adapter connection expansion board Generic name for CNVBD CNVBD Special adapter Special adapter FX3U CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX1N CNV BD Generic name for High speed input output special a
52. Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise resistance Using noise simulator of Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal 5MQ or more using 500V DC Comply with JEM 1201 Insulation resistance insulation resistance meter Groundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less 2 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Working atmosphere Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts Working altitude Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 3 4 If TC ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 2 Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 7 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use TC ADP TC ADP may malfunction 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Item Specifications A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 45mA driving power It is necessary to connect the 24V DC power supply to the terminal block 5V DC 15mA Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not necessary to supply the power Interface driving power
53. Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 Wiring 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of TC ADP are arranged as follows FXsu 4AD TC ADP O POWER O O O O O O 5 O O 4 O HUW 00000 Signal 24 L3 pilie L4 Application External power Ground terminal Unused Do not connect any lines Switches the type between type K and type J Channel 1 thermocouple sensor input Channel 2 thermocouple sensor input Channel 3 thermocouple sensor input Channel 4 thermocouple sensor input F 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque g 3 o To connect to the desired unit use a cable having a conductor s of size AWG22 to 20 To use a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable and then twist the core before connection To use a 2 single wire cable just peel the cover off the cable before connection B gt x lt 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque gt U Wire size Tightening a A A Termination stranded single wire t
54. Description of error If any of b9 through b15 is turned on this bit b8 will be turned on Number of averaging time setting error b10 1 Description of error The number of averaging time BFM 2 to 5 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the number of averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095 B 58 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test Program 8 Digital filter setting error b11 1 Description of error The digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600 Also check that the number of averaging is not set for the selected channel sw UOULOS gt 9 Abrupt change detection value setting error b12 Ovp ONEX 1 Description of error The abrupt change detection value BFM 91 to 94 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Check that the abrupt change detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode If the value is out of the range correct it 10 Upper lower limit detection setting error b13 1 Description of error The lower limit error detection value BFM 71 to 74 or the upper limit error detection value BFM 81 to 84 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Check that the upper lower limit error detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode If the value is out
55. GO n RUN monitor Mov E H3300 uneo specified 2 M8000 ia FNC 12 H01A2 U1 G22 vovg vnez FNC 12 MoV E K101 U1 G128 FNC 12 K102 U1 G129 vovi o rera sw UOULOS gt La l The convenient functions will be set 2 Ovp ONEX The upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D100 2 The over scale status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D101 2 The error status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D102 Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from BFM 10 to 13 into DO to D3 Clearance of upper lower limit error data X000 H MNA H0003 U1 G99 Clearance of upper lower limit error data Clearance of over scale data X001 FNC 12 a KO U1 G28 Clearance of over scale data MOV fil to i y Clearance of error status data X002 r 4 OU U1 G29 Clearance of error status data 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O day RUN monitor F M8000 e n FNC 12 D100 K2Y000 The upper lower limit error status data of each channel x MOV will be output to YOOO to Y007 E gt P O FNC 12 The over scale status data of each channel will be an D101 K2Y010 output to Y010 to Y017 go Error detection D102 0 G Ey Yoz0 The error detection signal will be output to Y020 3 Setting error detection 5 A D102 8 54 HE The setting error detection signal will be output to Y021
56. Kp3 gt Kp2 gt KP1 Ke En D E 3 Time E F gt Oo ozs TU gt eae x ie Proportional gain E 3 Kp KPA Kel Kp3 gt KP2 gt KP1 x O 5 TR iw 33 Time F Example 2 Proportional operation P operation in cooling forward operation 4 t 7 OS Proportional gain 3 T N gt gt Ly E Kes N Kp2 _KP1 ioe RRAS IAP 80 2 N Se d a S Y oN Measured value lt aaa A SS SS a ci E tT v ai pare arget value PV Y Remaining deviation 9 Pv 5 e 2 Time ms 52 A gs Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Output MV Time 3 2 5 Integral time TI S3 4 Setting range 0 to 32767 x 100 ms 0 is handled as lt no integration PID operation Integral operation In the integral operation the time after deviation is generated until the integral operation output becomes the proportional operation output This is called integral time and is expressed as TI As Ti becomes smaller the integral operation becomes stronger G 13 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters Example 1 Pl operation in heating backward operation o a Measured value in Pl operation z A A Measured value in proportional operation NY Tn o Integral time TI 5 O lt T13 lt T12 lt Th Time E Integral time TI z O lt T13 lt T12 lt T X ETA
57. N XW4 dav dav O Sion TI uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 5 This section describes the A D conversion time AID conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3u 4AD PT ADP FX3u 4AD PT ADP n th 1st FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start AID command conversion 200ps 4ch le ee value writing A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 200us 4ch Digital value writing A AID conversion during stoppage of PLC Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter AID conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written in the special data registers END instructio
58. PID Instruction FNC 88 6 1 Error Codes MEMO G 30 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Warranty o Ec Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and pre
59. PLC Note FX3uc Series PLC Manuals are available only in Japanese A 33 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment 5 2 Description of Related Manuals 5 2 3 Manuals of analog units The manuals of various analog units are described below Manual type Analog input unit Document number Supplied with product or separately supplied Description FX3U 4AD ADP Supplied with This manual describes the hardware of FX3U 4AD ADP USER S MANUAL JY997D13901 product analog input special adapter such as specifications and installation This manual describes the hardware of FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4AD JY997D07801 Supplied with analog input special function block such as USER S MANUAL product specifications and installation and also describes various programs DNS Jyg992p86001 Supplied with adas e AE e USER S MANUAL product PARSE s SSP installation and also describes various programs FX2N 4AD Supplied with This manual describes the hardware of FX2N 4AD analog i JY992D65201 input special function block such as specifications and USER S GUIDE product installation and also describes various programs Een Jy992D74701 Supplied with Pay ieee e tik es El o a USER S GUIDE product put Sp i p Analog output unit installation and also describes various programs This manual describes
60. Section 4 9 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to determine the entire system F 3 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using TC ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD TC ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Check of specifications _ Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring Refer to Chapter 4 Programming If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Outline of system eVersion number of compatible PLC eVersion number of compatible programming tool Specifications e Operation environment ePerformance specifications elnput characteristics System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Wiring eSelection of sensor cable ePower supply line eAnalog input line Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 3 Conn
61. Set the operation direction flag bit 0 in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 1 2 Selecting the auto tuning method limit cycle method Set to ON the auto tuning method bit 6 in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 1 When bit 6 is set to OFF the step response method is selected ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt Setting to ON the auto tuning execution flag Set to ON the auto tuning execution flag bit 4 in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 1 Setting the input filter Set the input filter in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 2 Setting the sampling time Set the sampling time S3 O a A WwW IM aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O Setting the maximum output value ULV Set the maximum value ULV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT 26 3 A gt 2 7 Setting the minimum output value LLV 33 U Set the minimum value LLV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT F CS 3 27 gt lt 8 Setting the threshold hysteresis SHPvV E Set the threshold hysteresis width SHrv in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 25 53 9 Setting the target value SV Set the target value SV to in PID instruction uononasul did 1 0 Setting to ON PID instruction command input to start auto tuning Auto tuning is executed according to the measured value PV y When auto tuning is completed the auto tuning flag bit 4 and bit 6 turns O
62. Software Version number Remarks GX Developer lt SWOIDSC GPPW J Ver SW8 P or later Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3uc e SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible C 5 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for 4AD ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient f 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 4 to 158 F when stored temperature Relative A gt humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm Vibration A 0035 10 times of testing in resistance DIN Rail Mounting i coc aa X Ya 57 150 4 9 pi and Z axis directions 10 to 57 E 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9 8 Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min A voltage Between batch of all t
63. TO Ch 2 K type Ch4 Unused RUN monitor Meee FNC 78 Data i d fi the ch 12 ata is read from the channe FROM vita in FXen 4AD TC Auto tuning is started RST D502 The PID output is initialized Auto tuning is started confirmed pies D500 D501 D510 D502 PID instruction Rao FNC 12 D511 K2M10 il Auto tuning operation is MOV Auto tuning ON flag M14 PLF Auto tuning is finished Auto tuning is finished M2 RST Auto tuning is completed G 26 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method PID operation Heater operation cycle timer 2 sec The heater operation cycle timer is preset avr onexy DY sway uowwog gt PID operation pea T246 D502 Heater output Error flag M8067 Error occurs 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O day oL avy nexa TI gt So d uononsu did 88 ONS G 27 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Error Codes 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Error Codes When an error occurs in the set value of a control parameter or the data acquired during the PID operation the operation error flag M8067 turns ON and a corresponding error code is stored in D8067
64. Terminal Layout aiii ida eb C 10 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 2 cccccsccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees C 11 3 3 Power Supply LINE iia in C 12 3 3 1 To connect to the FX3U Series PLC ooocooncocccnccncccococccnccooncncconcnanonccnncnnnnccnnnnnnnn cnn cnn anne ne ncnnannnnns C 12 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3UC Series PLC oooooonccccccnnccocccccnccoononcconnnononccnncnnnnnccnnnnnnan cn nn cn nannnc cnica tretet C 12 3 4 Analog pOT NE a dt o es C 13 3 5 Grounding iii ao idad C 13 4 Programming C 14 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data ccooooooccccnonocoooncnnncnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnn no nnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnncnnannnnnnnnnos C 14 4 2 Listiof SpecialDevices ceci caido did chia ted daba OR eis C 15 43 Switching of Input Mode dc ereet st de tcs ep een in C 15 ALAN A A stele eat cole bet dots EA AE AEEA A A eats C 16 4 5 Number of Averaging Time 2 cceccccceeecceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeesessaeeesesaeeseeseeetees C 17 46 Error Status x eee ce bee nese ee eee ape oe ed eet a ab orl Se ed oh he ae C 18 AP MOde Codes a C 19 4 8 Example of Basic Program cccccccccccccssecceceesssesneeeeeecesceessaeeeeeeeesseseeeaasaeeeeeesseeesiaaeeeeeesssaeees C 19 5 Changing of Input Characteristics C 20 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input CharacteristiCS oooooooccinnncccinnccccnncccccconcncnnnnnnccnnnnnncnnnns C 20 6 Troubleshooting C 22 6 1 PLC
65. Version Number Check 22 cccsccceeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeseseaaeeeesecaeeeesseaeeeessneeeeeenes C 22 6 2 Wiring Check caciooicocioiin aiii a ai e E ii diia C 22 6 3 Special Device Check A C 23 6 4 Program Check osiin iei ii id dida C 23 6 5 Error Status Check iccicococicnniaii iii C 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 Outline D 3 11 Qutlinesof FUNCIONA ad e ero Bei es ei D 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeecneeeeeesneeeessaees D 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeeesneeeeeesaees D 5 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeesaees D 5 2 Specifications D 6 2 1 Generic Specifications oooocccnnocooocccnncccononononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno non nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn rn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnns D 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeecaaeceseeaeeeeseeaeeeeseeeeeescneeesseeeeees D 7 2 3 Performance Specifications cccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeecaceeeeeeaeeeeseeaeeeescneeeeeesneeeeteneeees D 8 2 4 D A Conversion Time ri er e es ee dee te cent eet tect eet ten ee rte D 9 3 Wiring D 10 341 Terminal Eayout is ticce e
66. be 200us x number of connected analog adapters C 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time A 3 Wiring This chapter describes wiring of 4AD ADP Observe the following caution to wire 4AD ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS OD ANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock and damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system During the wiring work do not let cutting chips and wire chips enter ventilation slits Make sure to observe the precautions below in order to prevent any damage to a machine or any accident which might be caused by abnormal data written in the PLC due to the influence of noise Do not lay close or bundle with the main circuit high voltage power line or load line Otherwise effects of noise or surge induction are likely to take place Keep a safe di
67. be refreshed After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time of 5 seconds or more for each setting After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and the waiting time TO K50 again The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the EEPROM of 4AD Therefore even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid If a large amount of history data is read out the scan time of the PLC will be become longer If the scan time exceeds 200 ms the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate and the PLC will be stopped Therefore when programming separate the history data and then read out using BMOV instruction Set WDT watchdog timer refresh instruction between the separated data B 55 sua uowwog gt dvr onexs 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O day dav O Sian TT uoHONSsUl did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 4 Initialize Program for 4AD Factory Default 7 4 Initialize Program for 4AD Factory Default Execution of the following program will reset the input mode BFM 0 offset data BFM 41 to 44 gain data BFM 51 to 54 etc to the factory default status Conditions The sequence program described in this section runs under the following conditions 1 System
68. cable before connection 0 22Nem to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 0 3mm to 0 5mm AWG22 0 25Nem_ recommended terminal Rod terminal to 20 Al 0 5 8WH with insulation Refer to the external view Manufactured by Phoenix Contact sleeve of rod terminal shown in the e Caulking tool following figure CRIMPFOX UD6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate end of stranded single wire cable cannot protrude Terminate the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires Do not solder plate the end of the cable Termination of cable end 9mm e To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve 0 35 If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Insulation sleeve Contact area Manufacturer Model Caulking tool Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX UD6 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a purchased small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure Ihe head Manufacturer Model straight Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m gt 2 5MM 0 01 0 09 B 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring F
69. configuration 4AD unit No 1 should be connected to the main unit 2 Device assignment Device Description X000 4AD initialization command Example of sequence program 4AD initialization command X000 FNC 12 1 lumc2o The 4AD will be initialized mov amp BFM 0 to 6999 will be cleared 3 Cautions e It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization Do not set write any data in the buffer memory At the completion of initialization the value of BFM 20 will be reset to KO B 56 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 1 PLC Version Number Check 8 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error codes If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of PLC e Wiring e Program e Error status 8 1 PLC Version Number Check Check the version number of FX3UC 32MT LT The version number should be 1 30 or later gt For a detailed description of version number check method refer to Chapter 1 8 2 Wiring Check Check the wiring as follows 1 Power 4AD needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the 24 V indicator lamp of 4AD is on 2 Analog input line Use the 2 core twisted shielded cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to
70. cycle E As shown in the following table the sampling cycle depends on whether the digital filter function is used Y 83 EE ENE Value set in 3 2 Whether digital filter function is used BFM 198 Sampling cycle G 0 0 5 ms x number of selected channels for use of digital 3 Non of the channels use the digital filter filter function e function Set value ms in BFM 198 x number of selected Zs 1 or more Sy gs E of channels for use of digital filter function gs 5 ms x number of selected channels for use of digital 9 or less filter fi One or more channels use the digital filter ilter function function Dorm Set value ms in BFM 198 x number of selected channels for use of digital filter function 4 Multiples of 5 only are valid If any value of 10 to 14 is set the sampling cycle will be 10 ms If any value of 15 to 19 is set the sampling cycle will be 15 ms 2 Caution regarding use of data history function If the number of averaging time is set the data history function cannot be used 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of cautions regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 45 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 28 BFM 199 Data history re
71. data register to determine the version number of the compatible PLC z 2 A D8001 5 gt o g version number Po type and Version data Example Ver 1 00 PC type Example 24 FX2n FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series ES 2 Description of production number E A label is affixed to the right side of the product On this label check the number written in SERIAL to Z determine the date month and year of production z Example E m FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 gt x lt L MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMARLE z z MODEL FXsu 48MR ES 5 pe 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W 57 OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS 1 SERIAL 1 570001 F KON usteo som IND cont Ea CE amp ge MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION amp MADE IN JAPAN iw _ 5 U T Control number G i Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September 5 X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year Fa a g8 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for 4DA ADP of the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Software Version number Remarks GX Developer SWOID5C GPPW J Ver SW8 P or later Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3UC e SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used pro
72. data using 4AD ADP Loading of A D Conversion Data 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX Series PLC 2 If the data is stored in the special devices the number of averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 As the special devices special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned starting from the adapter nearest the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 Communic High speed FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD ation FX3u 4AD input output A A aie ers Sete FX3u FXsuc Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays AID Fr peca ale eee D8260 to D8269 i Special auxiliary relays ND M8270 to M8279 OL Special data registers D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays AID M8280 to M8289 LL ly special data registers D8280 to D8289 i Special auxiliary relays M to M8299 ab 1 special data registers e The analog special adapter nearest the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on In this case however do not include the high speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter C 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 Programming
73. depending on the input voltage current gt To judge whether a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Analog output products for FX3u Series e FX3u 4DA ADP gt For a detailed description refer to D A 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common ltems 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control Analog output products of other Series e FX2NC 4DA e FX2N 5A e FX2N 4DA e FXON 3A e FX2N 2DA gt For a detailed description of the other analog output products refer to the corresponding manuals 1 13 Temperature sensor input control Use the PLC to check the workpiece machine temperature measured with the thermocouple or the platinum resistance thermometer sensor FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Temperature data Temperature data E Analog data Temperature Digital value ls T sensor input AA cl special function ee cael mM block or special pe adapter i Measure the temperature of the equipment Check the temperature using the PLC gt To judge whether a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Temperature sensor input products of FX3u Series e FX3u 4AD PT ADP gt For a detailed description refer to E e F
74. detected it is necessary to clear the error status in a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program M8002 Initial pulse RST D8268 6 2 Example of program HH m m D82 tI D82 H D82 m D82 n m D8268 0 D8268 1 D8268 2 D8268 7 68 3 68 4 68 5 68 6 RST D8268 7 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog status register b7 OFF communication data error Detects over scale in channel 1 of the 1st adapter Detects over scale in channel 2 of the 1st adapter Detects over scale in channel 3 of the 1st adapter Detects over scale in channel 4 of the 1st adapter EEPROM error on 1st adapter Number of averaging time setting error on 1st adapter Hardware error on 1st 4AD ADP Communication data error on 1st 4AD ADP C 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code 2 Initial value K1 g Numeric data type Decimal K ES When 4AD ADP is connected model code 1 is stored in the special data register B The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code ES Special data register aoe 5 Description amp 1st 2nd 3rd 4th iS D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the a
75. e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure gt For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment IF could MEA Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible F 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data SEU g 3 3 4 Programming z MR This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using TC ADP B 3 E 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data a U 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3uc Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the number of averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 The special devices special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned starting from the adapter nearest the main unit For a detailed description of special de
76. eek ecteees a a t ented Geto Gl a B 57 8 2 Wiring Checkiiciiiciniiia ias B 57 8 3 Program Check iii idad B 57 8 4 Error Status Check cccoooicicina ii iaa B 58 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test PrograM ooooocococccnnnccncconoccncncconnnannnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns B 59 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 Outline C 3 11 Qutlinesof Functions 2i200 8 eel do ie ero lo e dd Aer eae cts C 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeennees C 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 2 cccceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeesaees C 5 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeesnees C 5 2 Specifications C 6 2 1 Generic Specifications ooooccnnonooocccnnccnononononnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnncnnnnn non nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnns C 6 2 2 Power Supply SpecificatiONS ooonoccccnnnccccnnnccccconnocnnnnnnncnnonnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn naar nn nnnnnn nn nannnnnnns C 7 2 3 Performance Specifications cccccccccceeeecceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeeecaeeeseeeeeeesecneeeeessneeeetseeees C 7 2 4 A D COnversion Time cic cs2 ascent er aot e es ee dete cant eet tect eet ten ee oe C 8 3 Wiring C 9 341
77. eii mal 5 4 8 detection abrupt change detection peak value holding 23 to 25 Not used 26 Upper lower limit value error status Valid if b1 A H0000 Hexadeci Subsection of BFM 22 is set to ON mal 5 4 9 27 Abrupt change detection status Valid if b2 of E H0000 Hexadeci Subsection BFM 22 is set to ON mal 5 4 10 28 Over scale status H0000 ge Subsection mal 5 4 11 29 Error status H0000 A o mal 5 4 12 30 Model code K2080 K2080 Decimal ere 31 to 40 Not used 41 Channel 1 offset data Unit mV or pA Voltage input KO at delivery Decimal i BFM 21 40000 to i 42 Channel 2 offset data Unit mV or pA will be 9000 3 KO at delivery Decimal Subsecci n used for z r 431 Channel 3 offset data Unit mV or uA 7 e Current input KO at delivery Decimal 5 4 14 writing 20000 to 44 1 Channel 4 offset data Unit mV or pa 922 17000 KO at delivery Decimal 45 to 50 Not used 51 Channel 1 gain data Unit mV or pA Voltage input K5000 at delivery Decimal BFM 21 9000 to 52 Channel 2 gain data Unit mV or pA will be 10000 3 K5000 at delivery Decimal Subsection A 7 used for 7 4531 Channel 3 gain data Unit mV or A writing e Current input K5000 at delivery Decimal 5 4 14 17000 to 541 Channel 4 gain data Unit mV or na 42 430000 K5000 at delivery Decimal 55 to 60 Not used 461 Channel 1 addition data Valid if b0 of BFM 22 160
78. executed normally Accordingly if the difference is less than 150 set the target value for auto tuning T Set the target value again when auto tuning is completed 2 Set item Setting in PID instruction 25 Make sure that the difference from the measured value is 150 or gS Targetvalue SV more when auto tuning is started 2 Sampling time Ts Make sure to set the sampling time for auto tuning to 1 second 1000 ms or more It is recommended to set the sampling time considerably longer than the output change cycle 3 Setting to ON bit 4 of Ss 1 operation setting ACT to start auto tuning When the variation from the measured value at the start of auto tuning to the target value reaches 1 3 or more auto tuning is completed And bit 4 of CS3 1 operation setting ACT is automatically set to OFF 1 Important point Start auto tuning while the system is stable If the system is unstable when auto tuning is started auto tuning may not be executed normally G 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning Execution 4 23 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control step response method For acquiring satisfactory control results in PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable to the control target This paragraph explains the step response method to obtain three c
79. extension block for FX2NC Input power crossover cable for 0 1m Series C E FX2Nc 10BPCB1 input extension block 0 3 e Special function block for FX3UC FX2NC Series The crossover cable type C can skip up to 4 16 point output blocks to connect units If more blocks should be skipped to supply power to an input block use cable type B lt Self made power cable gt To use self made power cables use the following wire rods and connectors Wire size Specifications model AWG24 0 2mm2 Crimp style terminal 50083 8014 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd Housing For main unit 51030 0330 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd For input extension block 51030 0230 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd Supply the 24V DC power to 4AD via the power supply connector FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 2 Power Supply Line 3 2 2 Example of power supply circuit Terminal block Terminal block FX2nc Series PLC Input extension block FX3uc Series PLC Main unit FX3uc 4AD FX3uc 4AD 15V Ls asv he Power PONEI Power crossover crossover connector connector connector Power connector Power Green Connector Black Black connector Red Black Black Red Red FX2nc 10BPCB1 FX2nc 10BPCB1 Power crossover cab
80. gt aos Time 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 3 Parameter 3 2 Details of Parameters Example 1 PID operation in heating backward operation Temperature Output MV Changes caused by disturbance TD3 PID operation te pacers O Target value PV Pl operation without differential operation TD2 PID operation Tp1 PID operation To3 gt TD2 gt TD1 Time i Changes in output caused by disturbance N TD3 PID operation N Tos gt To2 gt Tor To1 PID operation PI operation without differential operation Time Example 2 PID operation in cooling forward operation Temperature Output MV A To3 gt Tp2 gt TD1 Pl operation without differential operation Changes caused by disturbance Tp1 PID operation Tp2 PID operation pd Target value PV Tb3 PID operation Time To3 gt Tp2 gt TD1 1 Changes in output caused by disturbance A Tp2 PI operation po To1 PID operation Pl operation without differential operation Tps PID operation Time FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 8 Alarm output flag S3 24 When the input variation CS3 1 bit 1 is set to 1 A Variation ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt Measured value PV
81. gt 9 33 U a On gs E C 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 5 Error Status Check 6 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs on 4AD ADP the corresponding bit will be turned on Bit Description Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Number of averaging time setting error b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 4AD ADP hardware error b2 Channel 3 over scale detection b7 4AD ADP communication data error b3 Channel 4 over scale detection b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Over scale detection b0 to b3 Description of error The input analog value voltage or current value is outside the specified range The digital value is out of the range specified for the voltage input mode 0 to 4080 or outside the range specified for the current input mode 0 to 1640 Remedy Check that the input analog value is in the specified range Also check the wiring condition EEPROM error b4 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office Number of averaging time setting error b5 Description
82. gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter AID conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written in the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters Temperature Measurement To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on F 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 5 Temperature Measurement A 3 Wiring This chapter describes wiring of TC ADP Observe the following caution to wire TC ADP ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DD ANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock and damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical sy
83. however do not include the high En 2 speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter g S D 15 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If 4DA ADP is connected special devices will be assigned as shown in the following table R Read W Write Special Device number Mees A Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 R W M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 R W Section M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 R W 4 3 M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 R W M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 Sets the cancel of the channel 1 output R W holding function Special auxiliary M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 Sets the cancel of the channel 2 output R W relay holding function Section 7 4 4 M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of the channel 3 output R W holding function M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 Sets the cancel of the channel 4 output R W holding function M8268 to M8278 to M8288 to M8298 to Unused Do not use i l M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 i D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data R W D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data R W Section D82
84. install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION G 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 G 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction FNC 88 1 1 Outline of function 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of PID instruction FNC88 for the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC 1 1 Outline of function aw onexa OD sway uowuoo gt PID instruction orders the system to calculate the output MV value from the measurement PV value so that combining the P proportional action integral action and D derivative action can obtain the target SV value See diagram below 1 Alarm output function The alarm input can be set to ON for the input measured value variation or output value variation 2 Setting the upper limit and lower limit of the output value The upper limit and lower limit can be set for the output value 3 Auto tuning function The proportional gain
85. is not allowed gt 2 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts atmosphere Working Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 3 altitude 1 If 4DA ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 2 Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PUG equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Nat allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use 4DA ADP 4DA ADP may malfunction FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Item Specifications D A conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 150mA driving power It is necessary to connect the 24V DC power line to the terminal block 5V DC 15mA Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series it is not necessary to supply the power D 7 awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt dav avr nexs O 1d avenexa FTI dav var nex4 dav dav O Sian TI uononsul did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 3 Perf
86. is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30MA 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode 5 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels A 15 sua UOWWOD dvr onexs WW 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexa O aav ave nexs O day dav O Sian TI uoonsu did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 4 FX2N 8AD FX2N 8AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 8ch Analog input range 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200 kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum output Offset 15V 10V to 9V 1 2 30mA 20mA to 17mA 1 3 Gain 9V to 10V 1 2 17mA to 30mA 1 3 Digit
87. logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Revised History SEU Revised History Date Revision Discription 7 2005 A First Edition USER S MANUAL Analog Control Edition
88. methods for FX3u 4AD TC ADP special adapter 4 channel thermocouple input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION F 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input F 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 Outline 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3U 4AD TC ADP referred to as TC ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt FX3U 4AD TC ADP is an analog special adapter Connect FX3U 4AD TC ADP to the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC to load the data from the 4 channel thermocouple 1 2 for 1 adapter 3 PLC 4 adapters maximum including other analog special adapters te FX3u FX3uc Series PLC
89. minimum peak value Valid if b3 of F 101 BFM 22 is set to ON y Decimal Channel 2 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of 102 BFM 22 is set to ON i Decimal H S section Channel 3 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of 5 4 19 103 BFM 22 is set to ON 7 j Decimal Channel 4 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of F 104 BEM 22 is set to ON g De imal 105 to 108 Not used e E Hexadeci Subsection 109 Minimum peak value resetting 3 H0000 nal 5 4 20 110 Not used Channel 1 maximum peak value Valid if b3 ml of BFM 22 is set to ON j j Decimal Channel 2 maximum peak value Valid if b3 f 112 lof BEM 22 is set to ON i i Decimal e setio Channel 3 maximum peak value Valid if b3 l 5 4 19 113 of BEM 22 is set to ON 7 i Decimal Channel 4 maximum peak value Valid if b3 114 of BEM 22 is set to ON i Decimal 115 to 118 Not used Hexadeci Subsection 119 Maximum peak value resetting 3 H0000 mal 5 4 20 120 to 124 Not used Peak values Minimum BFM 101 to 104 Maximum 111 to 114 automatic transfer Subsection 41257 to first data register specification Valid if b4 of 0 to 7992 K200 at delivery Decimal 54 21 BFM 22 is set to ON Occupancy of 8 consecutive points 1 Use bO to b2 2 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data 3 Use bO to b3 B 23 sua uowwog gt dvr onexs 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O d
90. mode 15msxnumber of selected channels High speed conversion mode 6msxnumber of selected channels When the input is set to 20 mA to 20 mA 10 235V x jo pa Q a lt X 0 4mA 20mA The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are not insulated from each other 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA A 17 sua UOWWOD dvr onexs WW 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav dav O Sian TT uononasul did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 6 FX2N 2AD FX2N 2AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 2ch OV to 5V DC Analog input range OV to 10V DC jee E Ae Input resistance 200 kQ i Absolute maximum output 0 5V 15V 2mA 60mA Offset If the digital value is 0 0V to 1V 2 8 If the digital value is 0 0mA to 4mA 2 9 Gain If the digital value is 4000 5V to 10429 If the digit
91. of BFM 197 Turn on or off each bit to select the data history update function ON Ifa bit is turned on the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number but when 1 700 points of data are stored data will be then overwritten on the buffer memories starting from the smallest BFM numbers OFF If a bit is turned off the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number but when 1 700 points of data are stored data storage will stop 1 Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM 197 sw UOLULOS gt dvr onexs Bit No Description History data stored in bO Selection of channel 1 data update function BFM 200 to 1899 1 700 points b1 Selection of channel 2 data update function BFM 1900 to 3599 1 700 points b2 Selection of channel 3 data update function BFM 3600 to 5299 1 700 points b3 Selection of channel 4 data update function BFM 5300 to 6999 1 700 points b4 to b15 Not used MI aavvornex O aav ave nexs O 5 4 27 BFM 198 Data history sampling time setting z gt Setting range 0 to 30000 T Initial value at delivery K15000 5 Numeric data type Decimal K a Y Use this function to set the data history sampling time F If one of the channels uses the digital filter function set a multiple of 5 gt 1 Sampling
92. of the range correct it 11 Addition data setting error b12 1 Description of error IM covvarnos O aav ave nexs O The addition data BFM 61 to 64 is not set correctly 7 2 Remedy E Set the addition data again in the range from 16000 to 16000 5 53 is U 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test Program F If the above mentioned remedies cannot solve the problem initialize 4AD and then check the conditions of ES 4AD using the test program amp For a detailed description of 4AD initialization program refer to Subsection 7 4 5 GO gt For a detailed description of the test program refer to Chapter 4 d uonomisu ala G 88 ONS B 59 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test Program MEMO B 60 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input aw onex4 DY sway uowwo gt FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input M gav varnexs O aav ave nexs id dvp nex4 dady dav O Sian TT uononsul did 88 ON4 Foreword This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for FX3U 4AD ADP special adapter 4 channel analog input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual i
93. output points 4ch A 10V to 10V DC 20mA to 20mA DC Sue a 100mV to 100mV DC 4mA to 20mA DC 9 Input resistance 200k 2 Input resistance 250Q Absolute maximum input 15V 30mA e 10V to 10V DC 32V to 5V DC Offset 100mV to 100mV DC 32mA to 10mA 320mV to 50mV DC e 10V to 10V DC Gai 5V to 32V and Gain Offset gt 1V 10mA to 32mV and an 100mV to 100mV DC Gain Offset gt 1 mA 50mV to 320mV and Gain Offset gt 10mA e 10V to 10V DC With sign 16 bits binary Digital input output With sign 15 bits binary la avt nexa FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O 100mV to 100mV DC With sign 12 bits binary Resolution 312 5uV 20Vx1 64000 1 25uA 40mAx1 32000 50uV 200mVx1 4000 10uA 40mAx1 4000 e 10V to 10V DC 3 g Ambient temperature 0 3 60mV for full scale of 20V 0 5 200p1A for full scale of 40mA de g 25 5 C 100mV to 100mV DC Same for input of 4mA to 20mA F 3 0 5 1mV for full scale of 200mV 10V to 10V DC 3 d Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for full scale of 20 V 1 0 400uA for full scale of 40mA T 6 0 55 C 100mV to 100mV DC Same for input of 4mA to 20mA 5 1 0 2mV for full scale of 200mV Ba z W vine reciia for 1msxnumber of selected channels G conversion When the input mode is set to 0 When the input mode is set to 2 3 32767 7 Es Z 32000 f iE zg go Os 1 50 aS LIBRY e lt
94. power line Noise may cause malfunctions Make sure to perform grounding at one point on the PLC side to a shield wire or the shield of a shielded cable connected to a special analog input adaptor or special analog extension block Do not perform grounding at the same point as a heavy electrical system Noise may cause malfunctions Make sure to perform grounding at one point on the PLC side to a shield wire or the shield of a shielded cable connected to a special analog output adaptor or special analog extension block Do not perform grounding at the same point as a heavy electrical system Noise may cause malfunctions Use the product in such a status that excessive force is not applied on the power connectors and terminal blocks Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC GUN S2fcty Precautions MAN Read these precautions before using 2 WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock and damages to the product CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grou
95. power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special E data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number 5 of data items is increased to the set number of averaging time a ag Set the number of averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output F For a detailed description of the error refer to Section 5 5 v wo 2 Example of program S M8000 3 Sets the number of averaging time to 1 for the d channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter Normally G ON w Sets the number of averaging time to 5 for the z channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter AA aa Os gs E 17 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected on PT ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register me Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to
96. the digital filter function be sure to set the number of averaging time of the corresponding channel to 1 Number of averaging time BFM 2 to 4 for channels 1 to 4 If the number of averaging time is set to a value other than 1 and the digital filter is set to a value other than 0 the digital filter setting error b11 of BFM 29 will occur e If one of the channels uses the digital filter the A D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels e Ifthe digital filter set value is not in the range from 0 to 1600 the digital filter setting error 011 of BFM 29 will occur B 27 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 4 BFM 10 to 13 Channel data Numeric data type Decimal K Use these buffer memories to store the A D converted digital values The channel data BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 and the data update timing will depend on the set number of averaging time BFM 2 to 5 for channels 1 to 4 or the digital filter setting condition BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 as shown in the following table For a detailed description of the number of averaging time refer to Subsection 5 4 2 For a detailed description of digital filter functions refer to Subsection 5 4 3 Number of Digital filter Channel data BFM 10 to 13 update timing a function t
97. to be set by auto tuning step response method Parameter Setting position Parameter Setting position B Operation setting ACT 1 bit O operation direction Integral time TI 4 z Proportional gain KP 3 Differential time TD 6 S S gt 4 2 2 Auto tuning procedure 1 Transferring the output value for auto tuning to the output value CD Set the output value for auto tuning to the maximum available output value multiplied by 0 5 to 1 for the output equipment 2 Setting the parameter target value SV etc that cannot be set in auto tuning according to the system Note that auto tuning may not be executed normally if the cautions described below are not fol IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O lowed 1 Set items Set item and parameter Remarks z The difference from the measured value PV should be 150 or more e Target value SV For the details refer to 2 Cautions on setting below Sampling time TS 1 000 ms or more For the details refer to 2 Cautions on setting below 3 y Input filter a 2 Differential gain KD 5 When setting the input filter set the differential gain to 0 usually F Others Set other items as necessary x r amp 2 Cautions on setting 6 Su 1 Difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV ES If the difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV is less than 150 when auto tuning is started auto tuning is not
98. type voltage output or current output can be selected for each channel If voltage output is selected 4DA ADP Terminal 4 block ch h 4 Cc EA al XD EA COME Connection of external power supply line j 15V 24 24VDC aS Cla3s D grounding VO I chO O represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines and separate the analog output lines from the other power lines or inductive lines 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1004 or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure gt For details refer to User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment I A ae Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible D 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA
99. will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area and will ensure accurate measurement 3 5 Wiring of Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Twisted shielded Terminal 4 7kQ 4 7kQ Pt100 cable block l I Shield Twisted shielded cable Pt100 Class D grounding LOs LO IO chOl O represents the channel number 1 Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other motive power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise of the commercial power etc 3 6 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible E 13 aw onexa OD sway uowuoo gt ddv var nexs J ddv avr nexs O 1d dWy
100. 00 If the digital value is 4000 Gain 9 3 9 3 5V to 10V 20mA Digital output 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 4H1A 16mAx1 4000 0 1V 0 16mA Overall accuracy Does not include any load fluctuation Time required for D A conversion 4msxnumber of selected channels Operation synchronized with sequence program Output characteristics Insulation method Number of I O occupied points 10V Analog output 4095 o gt 4000 Digital input N Analog output S gt A 3 gt 4095 0 gt 4000 Digital input If the input data consists of 13 bits or more only the lower 12 bits will be valid and the other bits will be ignored The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC e Channels are not insulated from each other 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 1 For FX2N 2DA mixed use of the voltage and current inputs is not possible 2 Use the adjustment volume to adjust FX2N 2DA 3 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution A 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common ltems 4 3 Analog Input Output Mixture 43 Analog Input Output Mixture g 3 S T 4 3 1 FX2N 5A 3 1 Analog input B gt x lt FX2N 5A Specifications 0 Voltage input Current input U Number of
101. 00 DODDORDOOOODDoOt COM4 14 V4 COM3 13 C 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque To connect to the desired unit use a cable having a conductor s of size AWG22 to 20 To use a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable and then twist the core before connection To use a single wire cable just peel the cover off the cable before connection 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size stranded Tightening Termination single wire torque Sinde 0 3mm to 0 5mm2 To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the ngewe AWG22 to 20 cable and then twist the core before connection A To connect a single wire cable just peel the cover 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 off the cable before connection 0 22Nem to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 0 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25Nem recommended terminal Rod terminal AWG22 to 20 Al 0 5 8WH with insulation Refer to the external view Manufactured by Phoenix Contact sleeve of rod terminal shown in Caulking tool the following figure CRIMPFOX UD6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve To directly terminate end of stranded sing
102. 00 to 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON 462 Channel 2 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON Subsection E iti idi 5 4 15 63 Channel 3 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO Deeri l is setto ON 464 Channel 4 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON 65 to 70 Not used ie Minimum digital 71 Channel 1 lower limit value error setting Valid if dalie in nout Decimal b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON P range Channel 2 lower limit value error setting Valid if From minimum Minimum digital 72 b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON a value in input Decimal digital yalue in range Subsection input range to n FENE 5416 1a Channel 3 lower limit value error setting Valid if UPPer limit value isin ee seine b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON error setting value P range gay Channel 4 lower limit value error setting Valid if pcia ae aa b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON P range 75 to 80 Not used 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data 2 Use bO to b7 3 The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions Gain value Offset value gt 1000 4 The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions 30000 gt Gain value Offset value gt 3000 B 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 3 List of Buffer Memories BF
103. 0V to 10V DC Input resistance 200kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum output Offset 15V 10V to 9V 1 2 30mA 20mA to 17mA 1 3 Gain 9V to 10V 1 2 17mA to 30mA 1 3 Digital output With sign 16 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 1 254 A 40mAx1 32000 5 001A 40mAx1 8000 Ambient temperature 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy 0 3 60mV for full scale of 20V 0 5 100mV for full scale of 20V 0 5 2001A for full scale of 40mA Same for input of 4 to 20mA 1 0 4001A for full scale of 40mA Same for input of 4 to 20mA Time required for A D conversion Input characteristics 1msxnumber of selected channels When the input mode is set to 0 32640 7 1 32000 SEE ON as i Pitt 410V 9 S E 10V Sai BSI lt CA 32000 Ed 32640 When the input mode is set to 6 16320 7 f 16000 PL iE 1 toast 1 180 1 iN 20mA 0 pa lt L 20mA Sei ati Zhi ei 16000 maces 16320 When the input mode is set to 3 16400 5 E 16000 1 ise 1 o ILR 0 4mA 20mA Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter
104. 1 El Current 201 A The offset gain can be adjusted 2 OmA to 20mA DC 10bits amp Voltage 5 mV a 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits Mixed use of voltage and current 3 FX2N 4DA 2 4ch inputs is possible 1 Current 201 A The offset gain can be adjusted G OmA to 20mA DC 10bits A Voltage 2 5 mV i OV to 10V DC 12 bits Mixed use of voltage and current ae FX2N 2DA 2 2ch inputs is possible 4 58 Current 44A The offset gain can be adjusted gs 4mA to 20mA DC 12bits an 1 Refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding product 2 To connect this block to the FX3UC Series PLC either FX2Nc CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is needed 3 The offset and the gain of FX2N 8AD can be adjusted for the voltage input and the current input and current input except analog value direct display mode A 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 2 Description of Analog Products 2 2 List of Analog Product Models Type No of channels Range Resolution Function Refer ence Voltage current input output mixture Voltage 0 32mV Input 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits 4ch Current 1 25uA Mixed use of voltage and current i 20mA to 20mADC with sign 15 bits S Possible l FX2N 5A 1 f The offset gain can be adjusted 2 Voltage SMV The scaling function is Output 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits incorporated 1ch Current 20u
105. 1 Terminal Layout g The terminals of 4DA ADP are arranged as follows 3 gt x lt 2 FXa 4DA ADP G gt U O PONER Signal Application C Ol External power V Of E a tem off A Grounding terminal amp off cA H ofl 11 Channel 1 analog output g 3 ONO COM1 Of V2 al Ol 12 Channel 2 analog output 7 x gt x lt olL COM2 OO V3 5 HA gt sl O 13 Channel 3 analog output 3 O COM3 E H O V4 E 2 O 14 Channel 4 analog output 2 O COM4 3 E gt E 83 U gt e E gt p 50 U w OS gs5 D 11 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque To connect to the desired unit use a cable having a conductor s of size AWG22 to 20 To use a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable and then twist the core before connection To use a single wire cable just peel the cover off the cable before connection 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size stranded Tightening Termination single wire torque Sine wi 0 3mm to 0 5mm2 To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the A AWG22 to 20 cable and then twist the core before connection 5 To connect a single wire cable just peel the cover 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 off the cable before connection 0 22Nem to Rod terminal with ins
106. 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of PT ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to FX3u Series PLC 1 To use the external power 2 To use 24V DC power of PLC FX3u Series PLC FX3U Series PLC Main unit Main unit Terminal Terminal block block Class D A 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of power supply line e Ground the terminal to the class D grounding power supply line 100 or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3uc Series PLC FX3uc Series PLC FX2NC Main unit Series PLC Input extension block Power Power crossover Power connector connector connector Terminal block L Class D 24V DC grounding Caution regarding connection of power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC e Ground the terminal to the class D grounding power supply line 100 or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 4 Selection of Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3 4 Selection of Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Select the Pt100 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor This thermometer
107. 46 D502 LD lt Error flag M8067 020 END Auto tuning operation is confirmed Auto tuning is finished The normal operation is started Heater operation cycle Preset Heater output Error occurs G 25 avr onexy DY sway uowwog gt day gt So d 88 ONS 1e avrnexa MMI aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O oL avy nexa TI uononasu did FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method Auto tuning is started X010 FNC 12 K500 D500 The target value is set to 50 C MIE MOVP l FNC 12 The output value for auto tuning is E K1800 D502 Ei set to ON for 1 8 sec FNC 12 The sampling time Ts is set MOVP K3000 D510 to 3 sec FNC 12 Operation setting ACT MOVP dc Mini Auto tuning is started FNC 12 k70 D512 MOVP FNC 12 KO D515 The differential gain KD is set A MOVP a to 0 FNC 12 9000 D532 The output value upper limit is set MOVP The input filter constant a is set to 70 to ON for 2 sec FNC 12 The output value lower limit is set MOVP D533 to ON for 0 sec Auto tuning is started MO SET PID instruction operation Initial pulse M8002 ENC 79 The mode of FX2N 4AD TC is set AE ES H3303 Ch 1 Unused Ch 3 Unused
108. 5 Troubleshooting E 21 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 2 cccccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeceaeeeseeseaaeeeeeceeeesssneeeeseeess E 21 5 2 Wiring Chela a dai E 21 5 3 Special Device Check cccccceeescceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeseeeeseeeees E 21 a A agelo ELA EE ETET E Sess acme sd pela Pea east ete E aes ec as E 22 5 5 Enror Status Check e ee eee ee ete es te oe teen E 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 Outline F 3 11 Qutlinevof FUNCHONS usos eo aa o eee die dee dde i ace ase F 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ooooconoccccnnnocccnnoocccnonnnccnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnn cn nannnnnnnns F 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 2 cccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeseeeeees F 5 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool ooooncccccnncccccnnnoccconononcnnnnnccnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnannnnnnnns F 5 2 Specifications F 6 2 1 Generic Specifications ooooccccnonocooconnnccnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnn non nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nr nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnns F 6 2 2 Power Supply SpecificatiONS oooonoccccnnnccccinnnccccnnnncccnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nn nnnnn nn nn nnnn ranma cnn F 6 2 3 Performance Specifications cccccceecccceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeea
109. 500ms Sampling period Input characteristics When type K input mode 2 When type K input mode 4 is set is set 1300 2400 3 83 5 52 O 53 100 C 100 F 0 S 1300 C i 0 gt 2400 F Temperature Temperature 9 100 2 100 Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs e Channels are insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 1 For FX2N 2LC the rated temperature range digital output value and resolution depend on the selected sensor and mode 2 Accuracy is not guaranteed for the temperature range of 0 C to 399 C 0 F to 799 F of the thermocouple B input and for the temperature range of 0 F to 32 F of the PL Il and WRe5 26 inputs A 31 sua uowwog Ovp ONEXA WW 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav dav O Sion TI uoHOnsUl did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment Common Items 5 1 How to Use Various Manuals 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment This chapter describes the instruction manual of the FX3u FX3UuC Series PLC main unit and the various manuals of analog products 5 1 How to Use V
110. 62 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data R W 4 5 Special D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 output setting data R W data D8264 to D8274 to D8284 to D8294 to 7 i register D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Un s d Do not use D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W A D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 2 R pol 43 Switching of Output Mode Turn on off the special auxiliary relay to switch the output mode of 4DA ADP between the current output mode and the voltage output mode To switch the output mode use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay oan Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage output M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON Current output M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 1 Example of program To switch the output mode of a channel create a sequence program as follows 1 To switch the output mode of channel 1 2 To switch the output mode of channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter to the of the 1st analog special adapter to the voltage output mode current output mode M8001 M8000 o M8260 Normally OFF Normally ON D 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 4 Ou
111. 91 to 94 the result will be written in BFM 26 as the as abrupt change detection status data The minimum value of channel data written in BFM 10 to 13 Peak value holdin will be written in BFM 101 to 104 as the minimum peak value Subsection b3 function 9 and the maximum value of channel data written in BFM 10 to 5419 13 will be written in BFM 111 to 114 as the maximum peak E value If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM Subsection _ 125 the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the Peak value automatic A 5 4 19 b4 maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 will be automatically A transfer function a A X Subsection written in the specified data registers 8 points registers 5421 starting from the first data register specified ee iria If the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to Subsection b5 eats data Butomatie data register is specified in BFM 126 the upper lower limit error 5 4 16 status data BFM 26 will be automatically written in the Subsection transfer function ivi specified data register 5 4 22 Abrupt change If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to Subsection b6 detection status data data register is specified in BFM 127 the abrupt change 5 4 17 automatic transfer detection status data BFM 27 will be automatically written in Subsection function the specified data register 5 4 23 Over scale status If the over scale status data
112. A OmA to 20mA DC 10bits Voltage 40mV Input OV to 10V DC 8bits 2ch Current 644A The input format is common to 2 FXON 3A 1 4mA to 20mA DC 8bits channels l l 9 Voltage 40mV The offset gain can be adjusted Output OV to 10V DC 8bits Common to 2 input channels 1ch Current 64uA 4mA to 20mA DC 8bits Temperature sensor input Type K Mixed use of voltage current 100 C to 1200 C ik and thermocouple is possible Type J cae ee with thermocouple 100 C to 600 C ypes K J and T FX2N 8AD 1 8ch The unit can be switched 12 between centigrade and Type T 0 1 C Fahrenheit 100 C to 350 C The sampling function is incorporated Type K 0 4 C Compatible with thermocouple 100 C to 1200 C i types K and J FX2N 4AD TC 1 4ch The unit can be switched 2 Type J 0 3 C between centigrade and 100 C to 600 C Fahrenheit Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor x Pt100 E Y Pt100 or JPt100 A id A 4E 100 C to 600 C pect The unit can be switched 2 between centigrade and Fahrenheit Example Compatible with thermocouple Type K types K J R S E T B N PL II 100 C to 1300 C WRe5 26 U and L Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 JPt100 a lec FX2N 2LC 1 2ch Depends onthe nag 2 Fahrenheit Pt100 sensor input range The temperature adjustment 200 C to 600 C function that uses PID operation
113. AD ADP the average data will be stored as the input data The number of averaging time can be set for each channel x Set the number of averaging time in the following special data registers 9 gt Special data register ais 5 Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Number of averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Number of averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Number of averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Number of averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding number of averaging time setting If the number of averaging time is set to 1 the current data is stored to the special data register Ifthe number of averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095 the average value will be calculated to conform to the set number of averaging time and the obtained average value will be stored in the special data register After turning the PLC power on the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set number of averaging time After this the average data will be stored IM aav varnxs O aav ave nexs Set the number of averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range x an error signal will be output fr For a detailed description of the error refer to Section 6 5 5 53 2 Example of program 3 M8000 Sets the number of averaging F time for cha
114. AE Output in Pl operation e yt 6 TH Output in proportional operation Time Example 2 Proportional operation P operation in cooling forward operation 4 Integral time TI TTR N O lt TI3 lt TI2 lt TH TBA T12 E TI1 o Target o s 2 value PV A J lt Measured value in proportional operation 2 y PO o gt coe Measured value in PI operation No Time Integral time T1 X Z F 0 lt TI3 lt TI2 lt T11 Z ATIS e a 7 E a ca So eetbcacenietsqarecthendaptartsnseansee Output in PI operation 3 eo T12 STH Output in proportional operation Time Important point The integral operation changes the output so that the continuously generated deviation is eliminated As a result the remaining deviation generated in the proportional operation can be eliminated Deviation E Deviation Time Output of proportional operation integral operation AF Ss Output of integral operation ere Output of proportional operation Output a Proportional gain KP x Deviation E Time Integral time TI FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 6 Differential gain KD S3 5 Setting range 0 to 100 PID control Differential operation The filter is applied on the output given by the differential operation Only the differential operation is a
115. Analog special adapters input output Expansion board FX3U Series PLC special adapters coon BROS FX3U BD Up to 4 adapters can be connected ae seat ian excluding the communication special adapter Ags TON er ieee gt For a detailed description of system configuration refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC 2 FX3uc Series PLC Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3uc Series PLC e The expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter s Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected Analog special adapters Expansion board FX3UC Series PLC FX3u BD Up to 4 adapters can be connected Week represents 422 232 485 CNV or USB excluding the communication special adapter gt For a detailed description of system configuration refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC A 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common ltems 2 1 Various Types of Analog Products 2 1 2 Special function block The special function block uses the buffer memory BFM to send receive data to from the PLC sua UOWWOD 1 FX3u Series PLC e Connect the special function block s to the right side of the FX3U Series PLC Up to
116. Changes for the Better __ a MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS Y SEF Voltage Current Input FX3U 4AD ADP FX3UC 4AD Voltage Curret Output FX3U 4DA ADP Temperature Sensor Input FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP GUN S2fcty Precautions D Read these precautions before using Before installing operating maintenance or inspecting this product thoroughly read and understand this manual and the associated manuals Also pay careful attention to handle the module properly and safety This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories gt DANGER and A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in DAN G ER death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in CAU TION medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Depending on circumstances procedures indicated by CAUTION may also be linked to serious results In any case it is important to follow the directions for usage Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DANGER Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even when external power supply trouble PLC failure or communication error occurs Otherwise malfunction or output failures may result in a
117. DLI to DU 3 BFM 22 b3 ON BFM 111 to 114 T D 1 4 to DLI 7 B 40 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 20 BFM 109 Minimum peak value resetting BFM 119 Maximum peak value resetting sw UOLULOS gt Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H BFM 109 can reset the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and BFM 119 can reset the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 A channel number is assigned to each bit of BFM 109 and 119 to specify the channel to be subject to peak value resetting Turn on each bit to reset the peak value of the corresponding channel dvr onexs 1 Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM 109 119 Two or more bits can be turned on at a time Description x Bit No F BFM 109 BFM 119 gt Oo bO Channel 1 minimum peak value BFM 101 resetting Channel 1 maximum peak value BFM 111 resetting 3 p ig 2 b1 Channel 2 minimum peak value BFM 102 resetting Channel 2 maximum peak value BFM 112 resetting b2 Channel 3 minimum peak value BFM 103 resetting Channel 3 maximum peak value BFM 113 resetting D b3 Channel 4 minimum peak value BFM 104 resetting Channel 4 maximum peak value BFM 114 resetting x b4 to b15 Not used 5 gt gt U TU 5 4 21 BFM
118. Digital input 0 to 250 0 to 250 output 8 bits binary 8 bits binary Resolution 40mV 10Vx1 250 641 A 16mAx1 250 40mV 10Vx1 250 64 A 16mAx1 250 Overall 0 1V 0 16mA 0 1V 0 16mA accuracy Time required for conversion TO instruction processing time x 2 FROM instruction processi operation synchronized 255 with sequence program ng time O 250 4 IA 3 A i gt ee e 5 i 7 A MEN 2 El is 3 ale a po 3 i E i 3 ISIS i E i I O 3 is 3 i iS lo i E characteristics 5 S D gt 1 if 2 a lt 189 a ix O Pits PN 4ma ma 0 gt 10V 0 4mA gt 20mA 0 250 0o 250 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input If the input data consists of 9 bits or more only the lower 8 bits will be valid and the other bits will be ignored Insulation The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC method Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC points 1 Mixed use of voltage and current inputs is not possible 2 Use the adjustment volume to adjust FXon 3A 3 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution A 25 sua UOWWOD dvr onexs WW 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O day dav O Sian TI uoHONSsU did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analo
119. EVn EVn 1 EVn Dn Backward EVn SV PVnf operation ON 7 TD KD TD Dn Ts Kp Tp 2PVnt1 PVnf PVnt 2 Ts Ko TD Dn 1 MVn ZAMV 1 Symbols EVn Deviation in sampling at this time Dn Differential term at this time EVn 1 Deviation in previous cycle Dn 1_ Differential term in previous cycle SV Target value KP Proportional gain PVnf Measured value in sampling at this time after filter Ts Sampling cycle PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter TI Integral constant PVnf 2 Measured value in two cycles before after filter TD Differential constant AMV Output variation KD _ Differential gain MVn Operation quantity at this time 2 Expression for calculating the measured value after the filter in sampling at this time PVnf The value PVnf is obtained from the following expression based on the read measured value Measured value after filter PVnf PVn L PVnf 1 PVn PVn Measured value in sampling at this time L Filter coefficient PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter G 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction PID Instruction FNC 88 2 1 Explanation of function and operation 2 Howto Use PID Instruction 1 Instruction format 16 bit Operation Condition 32 bit Operation Condition Instruction Instruction A Continuous 9 steps PID Mi Operation ul 2 Set data Operand type De
120. FF in the operation set ting parameter ACT CS3 1 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 1 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control limit cycle method Output upper Output lower For acquiring satisfactory control results in PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable to the control target This paragraph explains the limit cycle method to obtain the amplitude a and vibration cycle T Ton of the input value and then calculate the proportional gain KP integral time TI and differential time TD based on the expressions shown in the table below What is the limit cycle method Changes in the input value in two position control in which the output upper limit value ULV and output lower limit value LLV are switched according to the deviation are measured and then three constants in the PID control are obtained Operation characteristics in an example of backward operation During the Tw period after the tuning cycle is finished the output value is held at the output lower limit value LLV and then normal PID control is started The value Tw can be obtained by the expression Tw 50 Kw 100 x T Ton and the wait setting parameter Kw can be set in the parameter 28 Setting range Kw 50 to 32717 When the abnormal ran
121. FM 128 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 44 5 4 25 BFM 129 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 44 5 4 26 BFM 197 Selection of cyclic data update function function for data history B 45 5 4 27 BFM 198 Data history sampling time Setting oooonncnnnnncnnnnicnnnnnnnnnonccnoncnnnnoncnnno rn rra rn B 45 5 4 28 BFM 199 Data history resetting StOPpPAYE ooomccccioncnnoccconnocncnononcnn nr ncnanr nar rnn cnn nn narran B 46 5 4 29 BFM 200 to 6999 Data history ooonoccninconnccicccnoccnnoccnnccnnnrnnanr cnn noc rnn cnn rr B 47 6 Changing Input Characteristics B 48 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics oooooooconncccinnoccconncccoconnncccnnnancnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnno B 48 7 Examples of Practical Programs B 51 7 1 Program That Uses Number of Averaging Time ooooconcccccnnnoccccnnooccccnnnnnnnonnnncnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn B 51 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions cccccccceeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeessnneeeesseeees B 52 7 3 Program That Uses Data History FUNCTION ooccccnnnonocccnncconancnannnnnnnonnnanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnns B 54 7 4 Initialize Program for 4AD Factory Default cccccccceeeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeees B 56 8 Troubleshooting B 57 8 1 PEC Version Number Check ws 2ccccctevic
122. FX3uc If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used some instructions and devices cannot be used B 5 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for 4AD 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient f 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 4 to 158 F when stored temperature Relative A gt humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequenc Acceleration Half amplitude PRES Vibration Hz y e cenit 10 times of testing in resistance m s each direction X Y 10 57 0 035 and Z axis directions DIN Rail Mounting raso Tas Total 80 min each Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric A y withstand 500 V AC for 1 min Between analog input terminal and each terminal of PLC main unit Comply with JEM 1201 voltage Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal resistance insulati
123. If data registers are already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify such data registers Be sure to turn on the peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 and the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 The data set in BFM 125 will be retained in the EEPROM B 41 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 5 4 22 BFM 126 Upper lower error status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K208 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 to the data register specified in BFM 126 Only when the upper lower limit error is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened gt For a detailed description of the upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 refer to Subsection 5 4 9 1 If BFM 126 K208 initial value Specified data register D
124. Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications Items Centigrade C Fahrenheit F input sidnal 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 parag 3850 PPM C JIS C 1604 1989 Rated temperature 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F range Digital output 500 to 2500 580 to 4820 Resolution 0 1 C 0 18 F Total accuracy A D conversion time Input characteristics e 0 5 for full scale when e 1 0 for full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 55 C 200us The data will be updated at every scan time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 500 550 4910 7 2 4820 7 E i ME 1 E E E dE oe c 482 F Insulation method Number of I O occupied points The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to i input area nsulate the driving power supply line from the analog Channels are not insulated from each other 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC E 7 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt x lt amp T gt z gt w U u 2s Cc A U T gt U TU 1d dWy
125. KP integral time Tl and differential time TD can be set automatically The limit cycle method or step response method can be selected 4 Operation method of the PID instruction PID speed type operation and measured value differential type operation are executed IM covvarnoxs O aav ave nexs O FX3U FX3UC Series PLC gt x lt Q Measurement value PV E O Target value eS SV a Controlled F PID Instruction object y 2 E 5 Output value MV 53 TU uononsu did 88 ONS G 3 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction FNC 88 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference PID instruction executes PID operation using the speed type or measured value differential type operation expression According to the contents of S3 gt 1 bit O operation setting ACT specified by in the PID control the operation expression for forward operation or backward operation is executed Each value required in the operation is specified by a corresponding parameter or later 1 Basic operation expression for PID control Operation direction ACT PID operation expression CS3 1 b0 Ts AMV KP EVn EVn 1 Ti EVn Dn Forward operation EVn PVnf SV OFF TD KD TD Dn Ts Kp Tp Oo YM PVnf PVnt 2 Ts Ko TD Dn 1 MVn ZAMV Ts AMV Kp
126. M BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Channel 1 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital dd Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON value in input rangel P22mal 82 Channel 2 upper limit value error setting From lower limit Maximum digital Decimal Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON iie aae value in input range Subsection dials Channel 3 upper limit value error setting digital value in Maximum digital oe 5 4 16 alld I O Is set to i value In Input range Valid if b1 of BFM 22 i t to ON input range lue in input Channel 4 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital 04 Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON value in inputrange P22mal 85 to H90 Not used Channel 1 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of 6 ve Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale paleta Desimal Channel 2 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of F 92 Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale a Decimal PEA Channel 3 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of F E 5 4 17 ae Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale elec Decimal Channel 4 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of 94 Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale 2e aulas i Decimal 95 to 98 Not used 99 Clear of upper lower limit error data or abrupt 4 H0000 7 Subsection change error data 5 4 18 100 Not used Channel 1
127. M covvarnos O aav ave nexs O Z x lt 5 4 15 BFM 61 to 64 Addition data E O Setting range 16000 to 16000 7 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K F If the addition data BFM 61 to 64 is set the set data will be added before storing the channel data BFM 10 to 13 peak data BFM 101 to 104 BFM 111 to 114 or data history BFM 200 to 6999 S L 1 Caution regarding addition data setting ES e To use the addition data be sure to turn on the data addition function b0 of BFM 22 G When setting the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 or the upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 v add the addition data BFM 61 to 64 to the error data to be set Of g S B 37 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 16 BFM 71 to 74 Lower limit error setting BFM 81 to 84 Upper limit error setting Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K Set the upper lower limit error data so that the upper lower limit error status BFM 26 can be detected The data setting range depends on the input mode set in BFM 0 The following table shows the data setting range for each input mode Input mode BFM 0 Set Setting range Initial value Lower limit value Upper limit value l Description Channels 1 to
128. MQ External load 5000 or less Offset Impossible to change Impossible to change Gain Digital input 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 4uA 16mAx1 4000 Ambient temperature 25 5 C 0 5 50mV for full scale of 10V 0 5 80uA for full scale of 16mA Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 1 0 100mV for full scale of 10V 1 0 1601A for full scale of 16mA Overall accuracy If the external load resistance Rs is less than 5kQ the load will be increased as shown in the Reference following formula Increase 100 mV per 1 E 47x100 o Ear 29 lime required err BMA 200us The data will be updated at every scan time conversion E eames A A 3 2 ES 3 1 19 O Output characteristics a e ee 3 1 tx T Xx o 1 0 O iO lt a 1 te ee lt ic 4mA lt 0 4000 Digital input o gt 4000 Digital input Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC A 19 sua uowwog dvr onex4 WU taave nexs FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O dav dav O Sion TI uononasul did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition
129. N XW4 day dav O Sian TI uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using PT ADP Loading of A D Conversion Data 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3uc Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the number of averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 The special devices special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned starting from the adapter nearest the main unit gt For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 Communi High speed cation input output FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD special FX3u 4AD special PT ADP PT ADP PT ADP adapter PT ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays pa A M8260 to M8269 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 OC D Special data registers L ecial data registers e The analog special adapter nearest the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on In this case however do no
130. NC Series extension unit Generic name for FX2NC Series input output extension block and FX2NC Series special function block FXON Series extension unit Special function unit block Generic name for FXON Series input output extension block and FXoN Series special function block Generic name for FX3uc Series special function block FX2N Series special function unit FX2N Series special function block FX2Nc Series special function block and FXon Series special function block FX3uc Series special function block FX3UC 4AD FX2N Series special function unit FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET FX2N 1RM SET FX2N Series special function block FX2NC Series special function block FX2N 232IF FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 32ASI M FX2N 2AD FX2N 4AD FX2NC 4AD FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FX2N 2DA FX2N 4DA FX2NC 4DA FX2N 5A FX2N 1HC FX2N 1PG E FX2N 1PG FX2N 10PG The number of connectable units however depends on the type of the main unit To check the number of connectable units refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system FX2Nc 4AD FX2NC 4DA FXON Series special function block Peripheral unit Abbreviation generic name FXON 3A Description Peripheral unit Peripheral unit Programming tool Programming tool Generic name for programming software handy programming panel and display units Generic name f
131. ONEXA IM aavvarnex O aav ave nexs O Set value Input mode Analog input Digital output Resolution HEX range range 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 0 32mV 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 2 50mV i gt 21 ad a cc 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 1 00mV e Analog value direct indication mode 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 1 25uA x 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 5 00u4A 3 Current input F 1 7 Analog value direct indication mode AMAO OMA 4009 10 20000 TAUA m gt x lt 6 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 1 25uA E 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 5 00uA 5 33 8 1 Samant mpu e a 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 1 251A 3 Analog value direct indication mode 9toE Setting not possible G F No channels used 5 1 The offset gain values cannot be changed Be Of 1 Cautions regarding input mode setting gs e Ifthe input mode is set changed the analog input characteristics will be automatically changed In addition if the offset gain value is changed the characteristics can be set to the desired value The resolution cannot be changed e Ifthe analog value direct indication 1 is specified the offset gain value cannot be changed e It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the input mode For this reason after changing the input mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more and th
132. Only when over scale is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting e Transfer to data register specification ON Valid Transfer from memory BFM 128 KO BFM 22 b7 ON BFM 28 gt D B 34 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 12 BFM 29 Error status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H sua UOWWOD gt Error data is assigned to each bit of BFM 29 1 Assignment of each bit of BFM 29 gt x lt Bit No Item Description 5 bO Error detection If one of b2 to b4 is turned on bO will be turned on 3 b1 b2 Power supply error The 24 V power is not supplied properly Check the wiring condition C or the supplied voltage Eb FX3UC 4AD may be defective Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi a b3 Hardware error ire i Electric distributor office w The A D conversion value is abnormal 3 b4 A D conversion error Check the over scale status data BFM 28 to localize the error 9 channel D b5 gt x lt AD conversiondata readin If change in the input characteristics is starte
133. Q 20mA q gt gt 10V eae ROA Sii oS Boi an I O characteristics LT eee 32000 TR i Ao 32000 A 32768 EN 32768 When the input mode is set to 1 32767 7 j 32000 5 IE 119005 TET BE kae ro 0 4mA 20mA A 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common ltems 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 3 Analog Input Output Mixture 2 Analog output Specifications FX2N 5A Voltage output Current output Number of output points Analog input output range 10V to 10V DC External load 5k to 1MQ OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 5002 or less Absolute maximum input Offset 1V to 9V 10V or less and OmA to 17mA 30 mA or less and Gain Gain Offset gt 1V Gain Offset gt 3mA Digital input output With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary Resolution 5mV 10Vx1 4000 204A 20mAx1 1000 gt Q Ambient temperature 0 5 200uA for full scale of 40mA y O z 25 5 C 20 5 E100MV for full scale of 20V Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Ambient temperature gt 1 0 400uA for full scale of 40mA 0 55 C EN Oa ee Ore for Tull Seale Or 20V Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Time required for conversion When the output mode is set to 0 I O characteristics 3 Other Specifications 32767 W
134. Thermocouple Data Input 3 4 Selection of Thermocouple 3 4 Selection of Thermocouple 3 4 1 Thermocouple type There are 2 types of thermocouples type K and type J Select the desired type However be sure to connect the same type of thermocouple to all the channels Be sure to use the insulation type thermocouple 3 4 2 Compensating lead wire To connect the thermocouple use one of the following types of compensating lead wires Thermocouple Type of compensating lead wire Type K KX KCA KCB KCC Type J JX e The compensating lead wire indicates a temperature value of approximately 0 12 C higher than that of the wire resistor 10Q Use the compensating lead wire considering this difference e If the compensating lead wire is very long the wire may be easily affected by noise etc It is therefore recommended for the length of the compensating lead wire to be 100 m or less 3 5 Wiring of Thermocouple Select thermocouple type K or J Wiring however depends on the selected thermocouple type Refer to the following wiring diagrams 3 5 1 Wiring of thermocouple type K Terminal block OPEN 1 Temperature compensating circuit Thermocouple Compensating type K lead wire grounding LOs LO chO Orepresents the channel number 1 Itis not necessary to connect line
135. V 0 tt l 5 10V e 10V 3 Sai Sai S gg gS ERTS TE Lonenenene 4000 SU ee 10000 ACARREAR L 4080 Yo 10200 2 Current input characteristics 4 to 20mA Input mode 3 to 5 Set input mode 3 Input type Current input Analog input range 4 to 20mA Digital output range 0 to 16000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 4 Input type Current input Analog input range 4 to 20 mA Digital output range 0 to 4000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 5 Input type Current input analog direct indication Analog input range 4 to 20 mA Digital output range 4000 to 20000 Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value Approx 20 4 mA 20mA Current input Digital value Approx 20 4 mA 0 4mA 20mA Current input Digital value 20400 7 20000 Approx 20 4 mA 0 4mA 20mA Current input B 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 3 Current input characteristics 20 to 20mA Input mode 6 to 8 Set input mode 8 sw UOULOS gt Set input mode 6 Set input mode 7 Input type Current input Input type Current input Input type Current input a O f E analog direct indication Analog input range 20 to 20mA Analog i
136. X3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 2 Description of Analog Products 2 2 List of Analog Product Models Refer 2 2 List of Analog Product Models The analog input output products compatible with the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC are described below 2 2 1 Special adapter Type pee Range Resolution Function Voltage current inpu t ence FX3U 4AD ADP Voltage current outp FX3U 4DA ADP Temperature sensor 4ch 4ch input Voltage OV to 10V DC 2 5mV 12bits Mixed use of voltage and Current 4mA to 20mA DC Voltage OV to 10V DC 104A 11bits 2 5mV 12bits current inputs is possible Mixed use of voltage and Current 4mA to 20mA DC 4uA 12bits current outputs is possible FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4ch 4ch Pt100 50 C to 250 C Type K 100 C to 1000 C Type J 100 C to 600 C 0 1 C 0 4 C 0 3 C Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 The product can be switched between centigrade and Fahrenheit Compatible with thermocouple types K and J 5 The product can be switched between centigrade and Fahrenheit 2 Description of Analog Products 2 2 List of Analog Product Models FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common ltems 2 2 2 Special function block 9 5 S No of z A Refer Type chan
137. X3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 4 Grounding 3 3 1 Analog input line The analog input type voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel FX3uc 4AD VO I0 call O represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from the other motive power lines or inductive lines 2 To use the current input be sure to short circuit the line between the VL terminal and the terminal L channel number 3 The SLD and terminals are connected to each other inside 4 Do not connect any lines to the e terminal 3 4 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 10012 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure gt For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment Lo a a aa Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm
138. X3u 4AD TC ADP gt For a detailed description refer to F Temperature sensor input products of other Series FX2N 8AD e FX2N 2LC FX2N 4AD TC e FX2N 4AD PT gt For a detailed description of the other temperature sensor input products refer to the corresponding manuals A 3 sua UOWWOD Ovp ONEXA WU day la avt nexa FT aav varnexa O aav ave nexs O dav O Sian TT uoonasu did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 1 Various Types of Analog Products 2 Description of Analog Products 2 1 Various Types of Analog Products Analog input output products are needed to carry out analog control using the FX Series PLC There are 2 types of input output products the special adapter and the special function block The special adapter and the special function block are described below to clarify the difference between them 2 1 1 Special adapter The analog special adapter uses special devices to send receive data to from the PLC 1 FX3u Series PLC Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3u Series PLC e The expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter s Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected To use the high speed input output special adapter s be sure to connect the high speed input output special adapter s first and then connect the analog special adapter s High speed
139. a will be updated Average data Each time the A D conversion is performed the average 2 to 400 value will be calculated and the channel data will be updated Average data When the A D conversion data reaches the number of 401 to 4095 averaging time the average data will be calculated and the channel data will be updated Average data 4096 will be set and the number of 4096 or more Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel averaging time setting error b10 of data will be updated BFM 29 will occur 1 Application If the measurement signal contains comparatively reduced ripple noise such as supply voltage frequency averaging will result in obtaining of stable data 2 Cautions regarding number of averaging time setting To use the averaging function be sure to set the digital filter of the corresponding channel to 0 Digital filter setting BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 To use the digital filter function be sure to set the number of averaging time of the corresponding channel to 1 Number of averaging time BFM 2 to 5 for channels 1 to 4 If the number of averaging time is set to a value other than 1 and the digital filter BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 is set to a value other than 0 the digital filter setting error 611 of BFM 29 will occur If one of the channels uses the digital filter the A D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels
140. acteristics 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics A EII 6 Changing Input Characteristics 6 1 For 4AD the standard input characteristics are provided for each input mode BFM 0 at the time of factory shipment Changing the offset data BFM 41 to 44 or the gain data BFM 51 to 54 however can change the input characteristics of each channel This chapter describes how to change the input characteristics Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics 1 Determine the input mode BFM 0 Determine the input mode BFM 0 optimum for the selected channels and the voltage current specifications Set value input mode Analog input Digital output Resolution HEX range range 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 0 32mV 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 2 50mV 2 eig input analog value direct indication The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 1 25uA Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 5 004 A 5 Current input analog value direct indication The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted mode Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 1 2514A 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 5 00uA 8 inputanalog value direct mdication The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted 9 to E Not used F No channels used Example Enter HFF00 in BFM 0 to set input mode 0 for c
141. al adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C M8001 Selects thermocouple type K Sets the number of averaging time to 32 for channel 1 data Sets the number of averaging time to 128 for channel 2 data M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8264 E FNC 12 j K128 D8265 pa FNC 12 D8260 D100 E FNC 12 D8261 D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or PID instruction Stores the current value of the channel 1 measurement temperature data to D100 Stores the current value of the channel 2 measurement temperature data to D101 F 21 awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt la avt nexa FT aav varnexa O aav ave nexs O gt o d 91 OWy N X4 day uojonnsul ala G 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of PLC e Wiring e Special devices e Programs e Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Ser
142. al l l l l Decimal 1899 Channel 1 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal 1900 Channel 2 data history initial value KO Decimal l l l 1 Decimal 3599 Channel 2 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal Subsection 3600 Channel 3 data history initial value KO Decimal 5 4 29 1 1 l l Decimal 5299 Channel 3 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal 5300 Channel 4 data history initial value KO Decimal l l l l Decimal 6999 Channel 4 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal 7000 to 8063 System area 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data 2 Use b0 to b3 3 Use bO to b3 and b8 to b11 B 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 5 4 1 Details of Buffer Memories BFM 0 Input mode specification Specify the input modes of channel 1 to 4 Hexadecimal numbers are preliminarily assigned to 4 digits to specify the input modes of 4 channels Change the set number of each digit to change the input mode of each channel O through 8 and F can be set for each digit HOOOO ch4e_ Lichi ch3 ch2 Various types of input modes are shown in the following table gt For a detailed description of input characteristics refer to Section 2 4 Initial value at delivery H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H sw UOLUULOS gt Ovp
143. al output With sign 15 bits binary With sign 14 bits binary Resolution 0 63mV 20Vx1 32000 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 2 5014A 40mAx1 16000 2 001A 16mAx1 8000 Ambient temperature 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy 0 3 60mV for full scale of 20V 0 5 100mV for full scale of 20V 0 3 120uA for full scale of 40mA Same for input of 4mA to 20mA 0 5 2001A for full scale of 40mA Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Time required for A D conversion Input characteristics 500usxnumber of selected channels When the input mode is set to 0 16320 4 d 160004 isa ES 1180 ICE 10V 0 y 10V Bai 291 Z See 16000 I AEREE 16320 When the input mode is set to 6 8160 7 d 8000 Gr 19 12S 1 a0 1 ten pa 20mA 0 B 20mA am OE 53 i ao INTA 8000 cian Approx 8160 When the input mode is set to 3 8200 7 e Approx 20 4mA 0 4mA 20mA Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 4 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the res
144. al pulse M8002 ad the input mode BFM 0 for channels RUN monitor M8000 A K0 5 seconds after starting the PLC the digital values of channels 1 to 4 BFM 10 through 13 will be read out to DO to D3 Unit number step 1 Sequence program transfer and data register check 1 Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC 2 The analog data input to 4AD will be stored in the data registers DO to D3 of the PLC 3 Check that the data is stored in DO to D3 If the data is not properly stored refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting sw UOWULUOD gt dvr onexs mM cav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav day voronasu aid G aravrnoa TI ag avi nexs 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 1 This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in 4AD Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 1 Assignment of unit numbers When special function units blocks such as 4AD are connected to the main unit unit numbers will be sequentially assigned to the connected units blocks starting from the unit block next to the main unit Check the unit number assigned to 4AD Unit number 0 eE Unit number 1 Unit number 2 Unit number 3 FX3uc 32MT Input output LT extension Main unit block
145. al value K64 Numeric data type Decimal K If the number of averaging time is set for TC ADP the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The number of averaging time can be set for each channel Set the number of averaging time in the following special data registers Special data register ae Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Number of averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Number of averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Number of averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Number of averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding number of averaging time setting e If the number of averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register e If the number of averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set number of averaging time and the obtained average value will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register e After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data items is increased to the set number of averaging time Set the number of averaging time in the ran
146. al value is 4000 20mA 2 9 Digital output 12 bits binary Resolution Ambient temperature 25 5 C 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 2 4 001A 16mAx1 4000 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy 1 0 100mV for full scale of 10V 1 0 1601A for full scale of 16mA Time required for A D conversion 2 5msxnumber of Operation synchronized selected channels with sequence program Input characteristics Approx 10 238V Digital output 0 gt 10V Analog input Approx 20 380mA Digital input 0 4mA gt 20mA Analog input Insulation method Channels are not insulated from each other e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Number of I O occupied points el 2 3 Use the adjustment volume to adjust FX2N 2AD Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC For FX2N 2AD mixed use of the voltage and current inputs is not possible A 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 1 FX3u 4DA ADP Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch Anala outout rande OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC Joue 9 External load 5k to 1
147. angement ocio tedden a aae B 11 3 2 Power Supply Line cceccccceeeecceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeesaneeeeeeaaeeeeseaeeeessaaeeeeseeeeessseeeeeeseeeeeseneeess B 12 3 2 1 Connection of power cable to power CONNECHOF oooccccooccnnononcnnoncnnononcnonnccnnnn nar nnn nn nan nr rr nnn nn B 12 3 2 2 Example of power supply CirCUit ooooooocccccnnncccccncnnococccncnnononncnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnn nn cnn naar nn rn rra anar nn nn nan B 13 3 2 3 Cautions regarding connection of power CableS oocconncnnnnccconoccccononanononccnno nor nnnnn nro r rr nnn rn B 13 3 3 Cable Connection to Input Terminal and Tightening Torque cooooccccnnnoccccnonococononcccnonnncncnonnncnnnns B 14 3 3 1 Analog input linen oi a a aa B 15 IA GOUGING cc da cl tn el elle cen Doe B 15 4 Analog Data Reading B 16 4 1 Procedure for Reading Out of Analog Data ooooocconnoccconocccocononcccconnoccnnnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnns B 16 5 Buffer Memory BFM B 18 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory ccccccnncoooocncnncccnnnooonncnnnnnnnnnnnnos B 18 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeecneeeeeseeeeeseneeeeeeneeees B 19 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification ooooonnincnnnnnnccocccnncnononccnconcnononnnnnnnnnn nn teeseen nn cnc nana nn nn cnn B 19 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction conventional method ooonncccnncccnnoncccnnoncncncnonanncnn anno rnnn cnn rn nnn nn B 19 5 3 List of Buffer Me
148. annel 2 temperature measurement data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data y D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data E gt The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified number of oe 0 averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data gt For a detailed description of the number of averaging time refer to Section 4 6 GG 1 Caution regarding temperature measurement v The temperature measurement data are for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the Be programming tool g ej 2 Example of program M8000 Ena D8260 D100 Normally ON FNC 12 D8261 D101 Now b82et D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or PID instruction Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 F 17 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 6 Number of Averaging Time 4 6 Number of Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initi
149. annel to the input mode setting value specified in the following table HOOOO md Dom SEE Input mode Anelog ipui Digital output range Resolution value range 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 0 32mV 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 2 50mV A a 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 1 00mV Analog value direct indication mode Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 1 25uA Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 5 00u4A 5 mon ae 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 1 251A Analog value direct indication mode 6 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 1 25uA 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 5 00u4A g Outrent input made lt 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 1 251A Analog value direct indication mode F No channels used gt For a detailed description of the standard input characteristics refer to Section 2 4 gt For a detailed description of the input mode BFM 0 refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Data Reading FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 4 1 Procedure for Reading Out of Analog Data 3 Preparation of sequence program Create the program as follows to read out analog data e While referring to step 2 set the input mode H e While referring to step 1 set the unit number in Input mode step 2 Unit number step 1 Initi
150. annels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied 0 point points This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC A 27 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 3 FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD PT Specifications Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch Input signal 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s Pt100 3850PPM C JIS C 1604 1989 New JIS DIN43760 or JPt100 3916PPM C JIS C 1604 1981 Old JIS Input signal current 1mA Constant current system Rated temperature range 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F Digital output 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 Resolution 0 2 C to 0 3 C 0 36 F to 0 54 F Overall accuracy 1 0 for full scale Time required for conversion Input characteristics Insulation method 60ms 15msx4ch 6000 ace ne a5 35 5L 52 03 AS 100 C 148 F 0 gt gt 600 C 0 gt 1112F gr perature 6 Temperature The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or
151. apters maximum including other Number of connectable analog special adapters f units FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Pe A ba be A bs usen TEA To check the model j P P oS Alo number of the l connectable PLC p gt refer to Section 1 3 l Ja he tt ae loo000lloo00000000 looooolo000000000 o00o0ollo000000000 oF oF q q Expansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed ar description of wiring 4 Analog data 4 refer to Chapter 3 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 For a detailed description Description Special devices of special devices refer Measurement 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 to Chapter 4 Transfer direction Sradapier temperature For a detailed description 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer Setting of temperature unit 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 to Section 4 8 P A I Setting of number of 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 averaging time Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to determine the entire system E 3 awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt x lt amp T gt z gt o U ES Cc A U T gt U TU 1d dWy NeXW dav dav O Sian TI
152. are not insulated from each other ea pau occupied 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC 1 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode A 13 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 2 FX3uc 4AD FX3UC 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range Absolute maximum output 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200 k 2 15V 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q 30mA Offset Gain 10V to 9V 1 2 9V to 10V 1 2 20mA to 17mA 19 17mA to 30mA 1 3 Digital output With sign 16 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 1 254A 40mAx1 32000 5 001 A 40mAx1 8000 Ambient temperature 25 5 C 0 3 60mV for full scale of 20V 0 5 2001A for full scale of 40mA Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy 0 5 mV for full scale of 20V 1 0 4001A for full scale of 40mA Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Time required for A D conversion 500us x number of selected channels gt Input characteristics Insulation method When the input mode is set to 0 32640 32000
153. arious Manuals Various analog products can be connected to the FX Series PLC to control the analog inputs and outputs PLC For wiring and installation of PLC eHARDWARE MANUAL Supplied This manual is supplied with the product User s Manual Hardware Edition Separately supplied R For sequence programs ie a Ei BOE eProgramming manual Separately supplied Analog products Depending on the product type the Installation Manual or the User s Manual is supplied with the product For a detailed description refer to the separate manual User s Manual Analog Control Edition as described below For installation and parts identification eInstallation Manual L Supplied For a detailed description of the programming method refer to the separate manual Eor installation parts identification use and examples of programs eUser s Manual Supplied Necessary information is in the user s manual but for a detailed description refer to the separate manual Analog control Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Temperature input For use of each product for analog control This manual eUser s Manual Analog Control Edition Separately suppl
154. asu did FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 3 Parameter 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 Set item Setting Remarks Input variation incremental It is valid when operation direction S3 1 0 to 32767 Cs 20 alarm set value ACT bit 1 of 1 is 1 4 Input variation decremental It is valid when operation direction 1 0 to 32767 21 l eit eet value ACT bit 1 of 1 is 1 It is valid when operation direction Output variation i sire Giger alarm set value OSO ACT bit 2 of tais x or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 0 122 val eae It is valid when operation direction Output upper limit set value 32768 to 32767 ACT bit 2 of 1 is 0 or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 1 It is valid when operation direction Output variation 3 ARAS enn alarm set value OO 326 ACT eet typis A or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 0 23 Val FORA It is valid when operation direction Output lower limit set value 32768 to 32767 ACT bit 2 of 1 is 0 24 The setting below is required when the limit cycle method is used when the operati bitO 0 Input variation incremental is not exceeded 1 Input variation incremental is exceeded or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 1 It is valid when operation direction ACT bit 1 or bit 2 of 1 is iga bit1 0 Input variation decremental is not exceeded 1 Input variation decremental is exceeded Alarm outpu
155. automatic transfer to data register is Subsection b7 data automatic specified in BFM 128 the over scale status data BFM 28 will i 5 LE 5 4 24 transfer function be automatically written in the specified data register Error status data If the error status data automatic transfer to data register is Subsection b8 automatic transfer specified in BFM 129 the error status data BFM 29 will be A s a 5 4 25 function automatically written in the specified data register b9 to b15 Not used B 30 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 2 Caution regarding convenient function setting Even if the data addition function is used the value before adding the addition data BFM 61 to 64 will be checked to detect the over scale error e To use the peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 e To use the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the upper lower limit value detection function b1 of BFM 22 sw UOLULOS gt dvr onexs e To use the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0
156. ay dav O Sion TT uoHONsUl did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 3 List of Buffer Memories BFM BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 Subsection 1261 automatic transfer to data register specification 0 to 7999 K208 at delivery Decimal 54 22 Valid if b5 of BFM 22 is set to ON a Abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 Subs ctio 41271 automatic transfer to data register specification 0 to 7999 K209 at delivery Decimal 5 4 23 Valid if b6 of BFM 22 is set to ON Ga Over scale status data BFM 28 automatic Subsection 1281 transfer to data register specification Valid if b7 0 to 7999 K210 at delivery Decimal 54 24 of BFM 22 is set to ON Ds Error status data BFM 29 automatic transfer Subs ci n 129 1 to data register specification Valid if b8 of BFM 0 to 7999 K211 at delivery Decimal 5 4 25 22 is set to ON 130 to 196 Not used Selection of cyclic data update function function Hexadeci Subsection 197 for data history 2 t0900 mal 5 4 26 198 Data history sampling time setting Unit ms 0 to 30000 K15000 Decimal apy tai J e Hexadeci Subsection 199 Data history resetting stoppage 3 H0000 mal 5 4 28 200 Channel 1 data history initial value KO Decim
157. b9 b2 Power supply error b10 Number of averaging time setting error b3 Hardware error b11 Digital filter setting error b4 A D conversion error b12 Abrupt change detection value setting error b5 b13 Upper lower limit detection setting error b6 BFM reading writing impossible b14 b7 b15 Addition data setting error Error detection b0 1 Description of error If any of b2 to b4 is turned on this bit b0 will be turned on Power supply error b2 1 Description of error The 24 V power is not being supplied properly 2 Remedy Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage Hardware error b3 1 Description of error 4AD may be defective 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office AID conversion error b4 1 Description of error The A D conversion value is abnormal 2 Remedy Check the over scale status data BFM 28 to localize the error channel After that check to make sure the input analog data is in the specified range BFM reading writing impossible b6 1 Description of error When voltage input characteristics changing is in process this bit will be turned on If this bit b6 is on A D conversion data cannot be read out correctly or cannot be written in the BFM correctly 2 Remedy Check the sequence program and confirm that the input characteristics BFM 21 bO to b3 are not written continuously Data setting error detection b8 1
158. bove special data registers to check whether 4AD ADP is connected or not 1 Example of program FNC224 D8269 007 Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter 4 8 Example of Basic Program Create the basic example program to read out analog conversion A D conversion data The following program will set the channel 1 of the 1st adapter to the voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode and will store the A D converted value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 MI aav varnxs O aav ave nexs data into D101 x E M8001 Sets the input mode of channel 3 1 to the voltage input mode 0 0 V to 10 V g M8000 Sets the input mode of channel 2 to the current input mode F 4 mA to 20 mA M8002 z Error status b6 OFF E 5 ES Error status b7 OFF S M8090 Sets the number of averaging G time to 5 for channel 1 data 3 Sets the number of averaging T 2 time to 5 for channel 2 data Sa gs lo Stores the A D converted channel 1 digital data into D100 Stores the A D converted channel 2 digital data into D101 M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 E FNC 12 l D8261 D101 Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter setting value or in PID instruction C 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analo
159. c Special function block for FX2nc Analog output elnverter etc Temperature sensor input eThermocouple he 2 3 D fe 3 ca a 3 0 E ra ro 2 c gt 2 fa D o 0 KR o E o gt D ePlatinum resistance thermometer o or Special function block for FX2NC FX3uc 1PS 5V IX La 7 Te FXanc CNV IF Special function FX2N and FXoN For a detailed description of connectability of the special function block and system configuration gt Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition e Use the FX3Uc 1PS 5V extension power supply unit if the capacity of the 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in the FX3uc Series PLC is deteriorated Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The following analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2N and FXON can be connected to the FX3uc Series PLC FX Series Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC Type FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC Analog special function blocks for the FXon FXoN 3A Analog special function blocks for the FX2N A 12 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common ltems 4 1 Analog Input 4 Comparison
160. c data type Decimal K Use this function to sample the A D conversion data of each channel and to write the sampled data in the buffer memories 4AD can sample up to 1 700 points of A D conversion data of each channel at the sampling cycle specified in BFM 198 and can store the sampled data as the history data in the buffer memories as shown in the following table Buffer memories are assigned to 4 channels as shown in the following table and data is stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number Use BFM 199 to stop or reset the data history Number of data BFM number sampling times ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 1st time 200 1900 3600 5300 2nd time 201 1901 3601 4301 3rd time 202 1902 3602 4302 1 700th time 1899 3599 5299 6999 1 Caution regarding data history reading If a large amount of history data is collectively read out to the PLC main unit using FROM instruction the watchdog timer error may occur in the PLC main unit Therefore when programming separate the history data and then read out using FROM instruction Set WDT watchdog timer refresh instruction between the separated data B 47 sla UOWUWUOD gt dvr onexs dav taave nexs FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O dav O Sion TI uononasu did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 Changing Input Char
161. cautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mi
162. ctive lines gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 6 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for 4DA ADP are correctly used 1 Switching of output mode Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode Turn on the device to set the output mode to the current output mode 2 Output setting data Check that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel 3 Error status Check that no error is detected on 4DA ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 D 21 dav avr nexs O M davy var nex4 1d dWy NEXW4 day dav O Sion TI uononsul did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 4 Program Check 6 4 Program Check Check the following items for a program 1 Device for setting specified digital value Check that different values are not written in this device using the other programs 6 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs on 4DA ADP the corresponding bit will be turned on Bit Description bO Channel 1 output data setting
163. d The temperature measurement data in b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value is not in the range from 55 C to 255 C Or the line between PT ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office Number of averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The number of averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 2 Remedy Check that the number of averaging time is correctly set for each channel E 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 PT ADP hardware error b6 1
164. d this bit will be turned E b6 9 on If this bit b6 is on A D conversion data cannot be read out a impossible gt correctly 3 b7 b8 Data setting error detection If one of b10 to b15 is turned on b8 will be turned on E b9 x b10 Number of averaging time The number of averaging time BFM 2 to 5 is not set correctly E setting error Set the number of averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095 z 83 Pear The digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 is not set correctly z oi Digital filter setting error Set the digital filter value again in the range from O to 1600 F The abrupt change detection value BFM 91 to 94 is not set Abrupt change detection a b12 value setting error cone ci a 9 Correctly set the value again E gt Ubperlower limit itor The lower limit error detection value BFM 71 to 74 or the upper nes b13 pper limit error detection value BFM 81 to 84 is not set correctly ge detection value setting error v Correctly set the value again b14 G U re P The addition data BFM 61 to 64 is not set correctly 5 bis ARCO Ca setting error Set the addition data again in the range from 16000 to 16000 2 2 Caution regarding error status gs If the error cause is eliminated the error bit will turn off Do not directly write H0000 in BFM 29 using the sequence program 3 Error status data automatic transfer function b8 of BFM 22 If the error status data automatic transfer to data r
165. d by PID instruction during auto tuning When auto tuning is not executed the same number of devices as those occupied in the step response method become occupied Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning 1 When auto tuning is not executed parameter setting It is necessary to write the set value of the parameters to S3 6 using MOV instruction in advance etc before starting the PID operation when auto tuning is not executed If data registers in the latch area backed up against power failure are specified the setting data is held even after the power of the PLC is turned OFF Accordingly writing is not necessary when the power is turned ON at the second time or later 2 When auto tuning is executed The proportional gain CS3 3 integral time CS3 4 and differential time CS3 6 are important constants for executing the auto tuning function described later and for optimizing the PID control These constants can be set automatically gt For a detailed description of auto tuning limit cycle method refer to Section 4 1 gt For a detailed description of auto tuning step response method refer to Section 4 2 G 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 3 Parameter awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt This chapter describes various parameters of PID instruction 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28
166. dapter communication special adapter and Analog special adapter High speed input output special adapter Generic name for High speed input output special adapter 2HSY ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP 4HSX ADP FX3U 4HSX ADP Communication special adapter Generic name for communication special adapter 232ADP FX3U 232ADP FX2NC 232ADP FXon 232ADP FX 232ADP 485ADP FX3U 485ADP FX2NC 485ADP FXoN 485ADP FX 485ADP Analog special adapter Generic name for analog special adapter 4AD FX3uc 4AD 4AD ADP FX3U 4AD ADP 4DA ADP FX3U 4DA ADP PT ADP sS FX3u 4AD PT ADP i S TC ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual 5 2 Description of Related Manuals 3 Extension unit 4 5 Abbreviation generic name Voltage current input Extension unit Description Generic name for the FX2N Series extension unit FX2NC Series extension unit and FXoN Series extension unit The number of connectable units however depends on the type of the main unit To check the number of connectable units refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system FX2N Series extension unit Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX2N Series input output extension block FX2N Series special function unit and FX2N Series special function block FX2
167. data channels 1 to 4 written in BFM 10 to 13 will be written in BFM 101 to 104 as the minimum peak value and the maximum value of channel data will be written in BFM 111 to 114 as the maximum peak value Caution regarding peak value To use the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value be sure to turn on the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 Caution regarding peak value e Ifthe data addition function b2 of BFM 22 is used together with this function the addition data will be added to the measurement data e Ifthe peak holding function is not used the peak value will be KO Peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM 125 the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value will be automatically written in the specified data registers 8 points registers starting from the first data register specified Only when the peak value is updated data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value conveniens on Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer to data register specification Snes y BFM 128 KO ON Valid Transfer from buffer memory Brane tasaa aeniea ton tie specified data register BFM 22 b4 ON BFM 101 to 104
168. detect errors Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO in channel 1 is outside the specified b5 range or disconnection is detected Number of averaging time setting error The temperature measurement data b1 in channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b2 in channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b3 in channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error E E 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If PT ADP hardware error b6 or PT ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status in a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST b6 OFF hardware error D8268 6 Initial pulse Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST b7 OFF communication data error D8268 7 E 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 Programming 4 6 Error Status 2 Example of program D8268 0 m D8268 1 m D8268 2 m D8268 3 HH D8268 4 ti D8268 5 Ly D8268 6 HH
169. dition of the workpiece or the equipment FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Voltage or A D conversion i current Analog input data a special function block or special cael he E adapter ES Check the flux rate using the PLC Output the current or voltage data from the flux rate or the pressure gt To judge whether a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Analog input products for FX3uc Series e FX3uc 4AD gt For a detailed description refer to B Analog input products for FX3u Series e FX3u 4AD ADP gt For a detailed description refer to C Analog input products of other Series e FX2NC 4AD e FX2N 2AD FX2N 8AD e FX2N 5A e FX2N 4AD e FXON 3A gt For a detailed description of the other analog input products refer to the corresponding manuals 1 1 2 Analog output control Output the voltage current signal from the PLC to the inverter etc to control the inverter frequency etc Inverter etc FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Casa Voltage or i mo conversion cin c rrent special function block or special gt adapter 1 Output the frequency data The frequency will be from the PLC changed
170. e 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using 4AD ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Refer to the common pages Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring Refer to Chapter 4 Refer to Chapter 5 Check of specifications h System configuration and selection o Programming o Changing of input characteristics If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Outline of system e Version number of compatible PLC e Version number of compatible programming tool Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications e Input characteristics System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Wiring e Selection of sensor cable e Power supply line e Analog input line Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Method of input characteristics change e How to use scaling instruction C 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number 4AD ADP is compatible with the following PLC Compatib
171. e DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA A 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common ltems 4 2 Analog Output 423 FX2N 4DA 9 5 S FX2N 4DA z Specifications 3 Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch B 10V to 10V DC OmA to 20mA DC y Analog output range External load 2k to 1M9 4mA to 20mA DC S i External load 5002 or less amp 4 q Offset 5V to 512 20mA to 20mA 13 Can 15 V or less and 32 mA or less and Gain Offset gt 1V Gain Offset gt 4mA Digital output With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary Resolution 5mV 10Vx1 2000 201A 20mAx1 1000 1 0 1 0 200mV for full scale of 20V 21 0 Ee OU f r full Seale ar 20MA Overall accuracy Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Does not include any load fluctuation Time tequired far Dis 2 1 ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value 1e a
172. e confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using Ifin doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor e Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples e This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor Registration e Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTION Sosa 1 Common ltems
173. e not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC F 7 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt gt o d av la avt nexa FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O 91 OWy NEX4 Q 88 ON4 uononsul did FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 5 This section describes the A D conversion time AID conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every arithmetic operation of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3U 4AD TC ADP POUAS TPP FX3u FX3uc Series PLC n th Sequence program A D conversion start AID command conversion a 200 ps 4ch Digital value writing i A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 200 us 4ch EZ Digital value writing z AID conversion during stoppage of PLC Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter
174. e this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION B 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input B 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3uc 4AD 1 1 Outline of Functions FX3UC 4AD referred to as 4AD is an analog special function block Connect FX3UC 4AD to the FX3uc Series PLC to load the voltage current data of 4 channels 1 Upto 7 4AD analog special function blocks can be connected to the FX3UC Series PLC including the other special function blocks 2 Either voltage input or current input can be specified for each channel 3 The A D conversion values will be stored in the buffer memory BFM incorporated in 4AD 4 Set the digital filter to stably read out the A D conversion values 5 For each channel up to 1 700 A D conversion values can be stored as the history data Point and s
175. eate programs for TC ADP of the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Software Version number Remarks GX Developer SWOID5C GPPW J Ver SW8 P or later Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3UC e SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible F 5 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O id dvp nex4 day 91 OWy N X4 qy d uononisu ala G 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for TC ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 4 to 158 F when stored Relative humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm TA T035 10 times of testing in Vibration resistance g F irecti Y DIN Rail Mounting each direction X Y 57 150 4 9 and Z axis directions 10 to 57 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9 8 Compliant with EN 68 2 27 Shock resistance 147 m s Acceleration
176. ect a dd ee ra eee D 11 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 2 ccccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesnaeees D 12 ENE D 13 3 3 1 To Connect to the FX3U Series PLC ooocconnccccccncccocccccnccoononcconcnnnnnccnnnnnnnnccnncnanan cnn cnn nananc nc cn enese et D 13 3 3 2 To Connect To the FX3UC Series PLC ooooonocccccnnococcccccnononcnncnnonononncnnnnannnnnnnnnannnn nn cnn annnnnnnnnannnns D 13 3 4 Analogi utout Line lt ce ein e tabs e do ote ae Nop a helo D 14 3 5 Grounding ccoo aaa iaa D 14 4 Programming D 15 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeeecneeeeseeeeeeeseeeneetees D 15 4 2 Listoft Special Devices ininda dada eset da eee cc A eee D 16 4 3 Switching of Output Mode 12 08 ea eetadee iaa a D 16 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ccecccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeetees D 17 4 5 Output Setting Dates 22 sti a o a ra a A D 17 AG EOS E A e a E D 18 4 Model Code a e a D 19 4 8 Example of Basic Progra e a ara aa a a a aa a a aie D 19 5 Changing of Output Characteristics D 20 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics ooooooocinnncccinnccccnnnccccnnncccnconnnccnnonnnnnnnns D 20 6 Troubleshooting D 21 6 1 PLC Version Number Checken e a aare a i eaa D 21 6 2 Wiring Check uiaiia ae aai e di a iE i ea D 21 6 3 Special Device Check A D 21 6 4 Program Check iii ad D 22 6 5 E
177. ectable PLC and lts Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number TC ADP is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 1 Version number check method Check the D8001 special data register to determine the version number of the compatible PLC D8001 version number PC type and L Version data Example Ver 1 00 PC type Example 24 FX2n FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series 2 Description of production number A label is affixed to the right side of the product On this label check the number written in SERIAL to determine the date month and year of production Example n FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 jpam MITSUBISHI Peas dd MODEL FXs3u 48MR ES pe 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS 1 AE SERIAL 1 570001 TO Aus LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ C a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year I Control number 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool Use the programming tool having the following version number to cr
178. ection to be 7 blocks maximum including other types of special function blocks Number of connectable units To check the model number of eeeeee the connectable PLC refer to Section 1 3 FX3uc Series PLC n a MsuBsH 3 For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 For a detailed description of analog data reading programs refer to Chapter 4 6 and 7 For a detailed description of sees the buffer memory refer to Section 5 3 and Section 5 4 Buffer memory BFM 0 Program e FROM FNC 78 e TO FNC 79 Transmission direction To use FROM TO instruction or to directly specify the BFM e BEM oireet gt j refer to Section 5 2 specification ULNGO BFM 6999 i Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3uc User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to determine the entire system B 3 sw UOLULOS gt Ovp ONEX la avt nexa FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O dav dav O Sian TT uoHONSsU did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using 4AD follow the procedure bel
179. ed J PID control is started after auto tuning X10 FNC 88 D500 D501 D510 Ea The target value is set to 50 C The input filter constant a is set to 70 The differential gain KD is set to 0 The output value upper limit is set to ON for 2 sec The output value lower limit is set to ON for 0 sec The auto tuning setting is started Auto tuning ON flag The sampling time Ts for auto tuning is set to 3 sec Operation setting ACT Auto tuning is started The output value for auto tuning is set to ON for 1 8 sec The sampling time Ts for normal operation is set to 500 ms The mode of FX2N 4AD TC is set Ch 1 Unused Ch 3 Unused Ch 2 K type Ch 4 Unused Data is read from the channel 2 in FX2N 4AD TC The PID operation is initialized PID instruction is driven The PID operation is executed G 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control Auto tuning ON flag M1 FNC 12 H D511 K2M10 PERE Auto tuning ON flag M14 Auto tuning is finished M2 7 PID operation is executed M3 a 1246 K2000 Heater operation cycle T246 RST T246 PID operation is executed M3 T246 lt D502 PID operation is executed M3 FNC226 t2
180. eeeeeecaeeeescnaeeceeeesaeeeeseneeeeeseneeteneeeees F 7 2 4 A D COnVersion TING ctricos lala F 8 2 5 Temperature ESC F 8 3 Wiring F 9 3 1 Terminal Layout umi e iia F 10 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque ooooccccnnccccnnnoccccoonoccnnnnnoccnnnnnnconnnnnnconannnnnnns F 11 3 3 Power Supply Line ici abad ad F 12 3 3 1 To connect to FX3U Series PLC ooooononccccnincoccccccconononccnnnnnnononcnnnnnnnoncnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncanns F 12 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3UC Series PLC micci n F 12 3 4 Selection of Thermocouple uote e a o e a dl a o oes F 13 3 41 Thermocouple PO nieva aa F 13 3 4 2 Compensating lead Witte comic aa F 13 3 5 Wiring of Thermocouple 2 2 24 c5 ieee eed pctacac e adhe bet eee dla ad gees be tet oars F 13 3 5 1 Wiring of thermocouple type K c0 ccs cccesecesseceesetoden cecuewesundeesbouecsudnenssecenekacedenedceedededdadsocedeeeteps F 13 3 5 2 Wiring of thermocouple type J serrr iaeia TE uae aia e aTi F 14 3 6 Caution Regarding WINN ee a rarr eera aa are aae a e e E a E EEES F 14 Sit MSPOUNGING 4 EEEE E E EE e a o do a E F 14 4 Programming F 15 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data cccoocooccccconocoooccnoncconnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nro nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns F 15 4 2 List of SpecialDeVICes ooooonnlrati lada F 16 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit ccccccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeseeeeeeeceaeeeeeseaeeeeseneeeeaees F 16 4 4 Selec
181. egister is specified in BFM 129 the data in BFM 29 can be transferred to the specified data register When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer to data register specification BFM 129 KO ON Valid Transfer from memory BFM 22 b8 ON B 35 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 13 BFM 30 Model code Initial value K2080 Numeric data type Decimal K K2080 fixed value is stored as the model code 5 4 14 BFM 41 to 44 Offset data BFM 51 to 54 Gain data Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K If the input mode is specified in BFM 0 the offset data and the gain data of each channel will be automatically stored The initial offset data and gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table e Offset data Analog input value when the digital value is 0 reference offset value e Gain data Analog input value when the digital value is equal to the reference gain value The reference gain value depends on the set i
182. el 4 output data set value of the 1st adapter EEPROM error of the 1st adapter Number of averaging time setting error of the 1st adapter TC ADP hardware error of the 1st adapter TC ADP communication data error of the 1st adapter F 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 8 Model Code 4 8 Model Code Initial value K10 Numeric data type Decimal K When TC ADP is connected model code 10 will be stored in the special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code Special data register 1st 2nd 3rd Ath D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Description Use the above special data registers to check whether TC ADP is connected or not 1 Example of program FNC224 Checks the model code of the 1st D9203 D analog special adapter 4 9 Example of Basic Program Create an example of basic program to read out the temperature measurement data The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data C of channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101 respectively The number of averaging time will be set to 32 for channel 1 and 128 for channel 2 O RST D8268 6 i RST D8268 7 M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog speci
183. en write the other data e HFFFF use of no channels cannot be set 2 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 times When creating a program therefore do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM B 25 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 2 BFM 2 to 5 Number of averaging time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K To change the channel data type from the immediate data channels 1 to 4 BFM 10 to 13 to the average data set the desired number of averaging time channels 1 to 4 BFM 2 to 5 The relation between the set number of averaging time and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table For a detailed description of channel data update timing refer to Subsection 5 4 4 Number of averaging dae time BFM Channel data BFM 10 to 13 type Error descriptions 2 to 5 Immediate data KO will be set and the number of 0 or less Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel averaging time setting error b10 of data will be updated BFM 29 will occur 4 initial Immediate data value Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel dat
184. erature sensor unit EX3u 4AD PT ADP Supplied with This manual describes the hardware of FX3U 4AD l i JY997D14701 PT ADP platinum resistance thermometer input special USER S MANUAL product T adapter such as specifications and installation ee eee JY997D14801 Supplied with ote ne oe as USER S MANUAL product pale OPIS MPAE SP pier specifications and installation This manual describes the hardware of FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD PT JY992D65601 Supplied with platinum resistance thermometer input special function USER S GUIDE product block such as specifications and installation and also describes various programs This manual describes the hardware of FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 4AD TC JY992D65501 Supplied with thermocouple input special function block such as USER S GUIDE product specifications and installation and also describes various programs FX2N 2LC Supplied with This manual describes the hardware of FX2N 2LC JY992D85601 temperature adjustment special function block such as USER S GUIDE product ddr i specifications and installation This manual describes the hardware of FX2N 2LC FX2N 2LC JY992D85801 Separately temperature adjustment special function block such as USER S MANUAL supplied specifications and installation and also describes various programs sua UOWWOD Qvr Onexs WW 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav dav O Sian TI uoHONSsUl did 88 ONS 6 Generic Names and
185. erminal Rod terminal AWG22 to 20 Al 0 5 8WH D with insulation Refer to the external view Manufactured by Phoenix Contact E sleeve of rod terminal shown in the Caulking tool a following figure CRIMPFOX UD6 E Manufactured by Phoenix Contact a U TU 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve A g T e To directly terminate end of stranded single wire cable Dn OF cabin z Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude WH es 53 Do not solder plate the end of the cable 2 9mm 0 35 F e To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve 7 If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area E the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while 3 referring to the external view 0 31 33 Manufacturer Type Caulking tool 2 6mm 2 0 1 A G Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX UD6 0 55 v 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a purchased small sized screwdriver whose 25 head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure M aa gs Manufacturer Type straight Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4 x 2 5 0 4m 2 5mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3
186. erminals and ground terminal Comply with JEM 1201 Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Greundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less 7 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts atmosphere OMS Compliant with 1EC61131 2 lt 2000m 3 altitude 1 If 4AD ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 2 Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PUG equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Nat allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use 4AD ADP 4AD ADP may malfunction FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications g 3 S T a Item Specifications A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 40mA B driving power It is necessary to connect the 24V DC power supply to the terminal block y 5V DC 15mA 5 Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not 3 necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications Spec
187. error yr Chamel 2 output data setting error i ssti i lt zi s s S b2 Channel 3 output data setting error b3 Channel 4 output data setting error b ERA b5 to b15 Unused To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Output data setting error b0 to b3 1 Description of error The specified digital value is outside the specified range Analog data will not be correctly output 2 Remedy Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input aw onex4 DY sway uowwog gt FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input ddv var nexs J ddv avr nexs O 1d dWy N XW4 day dav vononasu aid G oravaa TT 88 ON4 Foreword This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for FX3U 4AD PT ADP special adapter 4 channel platinum resistance thermometer input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this ma
188. es the convenient functions BFM 22 of 4AD Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions 1 2 System configuration 4AD unit No 1 should be connected to the main unit Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V gt 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0 to 16000 Number of averaging time For all the channels the number of averaging time should be set to 1 default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the number of averaging time in the sequence program Digital filter function For all the channels the digital filter function should be disabled default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program Convenient functions The upper lower limit detection function upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function over scale status data automatic transfer function and error status data automatic transfer function should be used Device assignment Device Desea X000 Clearance of upper lower limit error data Input X001 Clearance of over scale data X002 Clearance of error status data Y000 Output of channel 1 lower limit error data Y001 Output of channel 1 upper limit error data Y002 Output of channel 2 lower li
189. escription D208 Upper lower limit error status data in BFM 26 2 Caution regarding upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify such a data register e Be sure to turn on the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 and the upper lower limit detection function b1 of BFM 22 The data set in BFM 126 will be retained in the EEPROM 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 42 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 23 BFM 127 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specification sw UOLULOS gt Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K209 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 to the data register specified in BFM 127 Only when abrupt change is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and t
190. fer Memories 2 Offset gain data change Set offset data and gain data to change the input output characteristics The offset and gain data can be set for each channel If the voltage input mode is set write the offset and gain data in mV If the current input mode is set write the offset and gain data in uA To change the offset data or gain data turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 21 buffer memory for input characteristics writing The data setting range is shown in the following table sla UOWULUOD gt ES Voltage input mV Current input uA 3 Offset data 10000 to 9000 20000 to 17000 2 Gain data 9000 to 10000 1 17000 to 30000 2 4 The offset and gain values should meet the following condition Gain value Offset value gt 1000 2 The offset and gain values should meet the following condition 30000 gt Gain value Offset value gt 3000 3 Caution regarding offset gain data change e If the analog value direct indication mode is used the input output characteristics cannot be changed e Even if the input output characteristics are changed the actual input valid range will not be changed from 10V to 10V for the voltage input mode and from 20mA to 20mA for the current input mode Even if the input output characteristics are changed the resolution will not be increased gt For a detailed description of input output characteristics change refer to Chapter 6 I
191. ffected by the differential gain KD When the differential gain KD is small the output is immediately given with regard to changes in the measured value PV caused by disturbance etc e When the differential gain KD is large the output is given after a long time with regard to changes in the measured value PV caused by disturbance etc ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt Important points Set the differential gain KD to 0 and then adjust the operation using the input filter a If the output response is too close to the disturbance increase the differential gain KD 3 2 7 Differential time TD S3 6 Setting range 0 to 32767 x 10 ms PID control Differential operation Use the differential time TD to respond sensitively to fluctuations in the measured value PV caused by disturbance etc and to minimize the fluctuation When the differential time TD is large it becomes to prevent large fluctuation in the control target caused by disturbance etc IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O e Itis not always necessary to use the differential time when disturbance is small for example x 4 E gt E TD3 PID operation 9 Q 83 3 3 Disturbance Sss T TTT N p J EE a F My TD1 PID operation Deviation EV 2 TD2 PID operation a a A Time 8 ba TU z To3 PID operation X To3 gt TD2 gt TD1 a To2 PID operation 3 e Tp1 PID operation _3 4 33 RN Ru ro 2
192. form class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system During the wiring work do not let cutting chips and wire chips enter ventilation slits Make sure to observe the precautions below in order to prevent any damage to a machine or any accident which might be caused by abnormal data written in the PLC due to the influence of noise Do not lay close or bundle with the main circuit high voltage power line or load line Otherwise effects of noise or surge induction are likely to take place Keep a safe distance of more than 100 mm 3 94 from the above when wiring Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not ground at the same point as high voltage lines Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stres
193. g Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 1 FX3U 4AD PT ADP Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch Input signal 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s Pt100 3850 PPM C JIS C 1604 1989 Rated temperature range 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F Digital output 500 to 2500 580 to 4820 Resolution 0 1 C 0 18 F gt Ambient temperature 0 59 5 25 5 C 0 5 for full scale O Ambient temperature O 0 to 55 C 1 0 for full scale Time required for conversion Input characteristics Insulation method Number of I O occupied points 200us The data will be updated at every scan time 25509 o y 19 Lo LO ce e DS 9 03 E OQ po 50 C q 30 Sto 0 gt 250 C ZE 500 Temperature Approx 491 F The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other 0 point This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC A 26 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance S
194. g Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 5 Changing of Input Characteristics Use scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 of the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC to change the input characteristics gt For a detailed description of scaling instruction refer to the FX3U FX3UC Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 400 to 2000 when the voltage input is 1 to 5V to the digital output range of O to 10000 1 Input characteristics Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed z product specifications Y axis OOO res rarer re tay 10000 3 i 2 3 RE gt 37 a 58 D e gt 28 400 PA X axis 0 4v 5V __ gt 10V 0 400 1V 2000 5V Analog input Digital value actually obtained by A D conversion 2 Example of program For example create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode 0 V to 10 V M8002 Error status b6 OFF Error status b7 OFF Sets the number of averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data a Program for setting scaling instruction table data Item Device O K400 Number of points Sets the number of points D50 X A D conve
195. ge from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output For a detailed description of the error refer to Section 5 5 D8264 D8265 2 Example of program M8000 FNC 12 K32 Normally MOV ON FNC 12 K128 EALA Sets the number of averaging time to 32 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter Sets the number of averaging time to 128 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter F 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 7 Error Status 4 7 Error Status 8 3 Oo If an error is detected on TC ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register 5 The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data B Special data register e y Description s 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5 des D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data 5 Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO in channel 1 is outside the specified b5 range or disconnection is detected Number of averaging time setting error The temperature measurement data b1 in channel 2 is
196. ge is specified Tw is handled as 0 Output value ULV limit value LLV 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I l I limit value ro a al rt rt ara i i 1 1 1 I l Time 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I j 1 j 1 I i 1 I 1 i 1 I j L I i I I I I L 1 I j I j I j I 1 I I t I I j i j I j l t I I I 1 j I j l j l I j I I 1 1 I I 1 I I l 1 l 1 I I Input value H l I l I I I l 1 j 1 1 1 l l l I I l 1 1 I 1 l l I I I l 1 1 I 1 l l I I 1 l 1 I 1 I 1 f l I I 1 l 1 I 1 I 1 l l I I I l 1 I 1 I 1 I l I l I l 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 a n o o aie ci NEF T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 j I I i Sisi ess E ME A Y a O A ma are Ce ore SV target value a SV SHpv AERTS eS GUN a ees oN e ia e UE dE a igo shes ee 1 1 1 io I 1 1 1 I 1 1 l Ii I 1 1 1 SAA a ee ee ee 1 1 I I TE Y 1 1 1 A lt N I gt To Ta T2 Time s SHpv PV input threshold hysteresis Operation characteristics and three constants Control type Proportional gain KP Integral time TI lt 100ms Differential time TD lt 10ms _ E Tuv uvi z fam Bun wate 2 Po o 12 ULV LLV 20 xT on 1 zan 50XTon 1 y ton G 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 2 Step Response Method 4 2 Step Response Method i 3 3 S 4 2 1 Parameters
197. gital value is not input check the following items e Version number of PLC e Wiring Special devices e Programs Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of the FX3uc 32MT LT The version number should be 1 30 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power PT ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of PT ADP is on 2 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from the other motive power cables or inductive cables For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 5 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for PT ADP are correctly used 1 Temperature measurement Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 2 Number of averaging time Check that the set number of averaging time is within the specified range The number of averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set number of averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 3 E
198. gramming will not be possible D 5 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for 4DA ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient f 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 4 to 158 F when stored temperature Relative A gt humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm Vibration A 0035 10 times of testing in resistance DIN Rail Mounting i coc aut X Ya 57 150 4 9 pi and Z axis directions 10 to 57 E 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9 8 Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min A voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal Comply with JEM 1201 Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Greundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less 7 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system
199. gs 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time of 5 seconds or more for each setting After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and the waiting time TO K50 again 2 The set input mode convenient functions upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register number over scale status data automatic transfer to data register number and error status data automatic transfer to data register number are retained in the EEPROM of 4AD For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid B 53 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function This section describes a program that uses the data history function of 4AD Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following functions 1 2 System configuration 4AD unit No 1 should be connected to the main unit Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V gt 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0 to 16000 Number of averaging time For all the channels the number of averaging time should be set to 1 default To use t
200. hannels 1 and 2 and prevent use channels 3 and 4 Caution regarding data setting e Ifa value 2 5 8 or F is set for a channel the input characteristics of the channel cannot be changed Set the optimum input mode for the analog signal to be input 2 Determine the input characteristics to be changed Determine the digital value to be output according to the input voltage current FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 Changing Input Characteristics 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics Example To output digital values in the range from 0 to 10000 by inputting the voltage in the range from 1V DC to 5V DC Input mode 0 Input characteristics provided at the time of factory shipment Gain reference value Input voltage Approx 10 2 V 10V 0 Digital value 32640 7 32000 H 16000 5V 10V PEE 32000 fe Approx 32640 3 Determine the offset data Approx 10 2 V Input characteristics newly provided Digital value 32000 Gain reference value 16000 Offset reference value 0 Input voltage Determine the analog input value offset data for digital output value of 0 Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode and set the analog input value in uA sua uowwog gt dvr onexs 1V 3V 5V IM aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O
201. he corresponding channel Example Program for changing the input characteristics of channels 1 and 2 UNGO Command for writing input characteristics X000 FNC 12 HFFOO vovg NFO Input mode specification for channels 1 to 4 Offset value of channels 1 and 2 Gain value of channels 1 and 2 Batch writing of offset and gain values of channels 1 and 2 FNC 12 H0003 U1 G21 mor y Mes unez 1 It takes approximately 5 seconds to change the input mode BFM 0 This is because all the set values should be changed After changing the input mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before setting other data The input characteristics of each channel can be written in BFM 21 It is also possible to perform batch writing of input characteristics for two or more channels 6 Transfer the sequence program to change the input characteristics Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC Start the PLC and turn on the command X000 for writing the input characteristics In approx 5 seconds the offset data and the gain data will be written Since the offset data and the gain data are stored in the EEPROM incorporated in 4AD it is possi ble to delete the pre written sequence program 7 Read out the analog data to check the data Create the following program to check the stored data RUN monitor The digital values set for M8000 FNC 16 U1G10 DO K4 channels 1 to 4 will be read BMOV out to DO through D3
202. he default value it is not necessary to set the number of averaging time in the sequence program Digital filter function For all the channels the digital filter function should be disabled default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program Data history function For all the channels the data sampling time should be set to 100 ms The sampling cycle should be 100 ms x 4 number of selected channels 400 ms For all the channels data will be sampled 100 times and the sampled data will be stored as the data history in the data registers Device assignment Device Description X000 Clearance of data history meu X001 Temporarily stoppage of data history DO A D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A D converted digital value of channel 3 D3 A D converted digital value of channel 4 Data register z D100 to D199 Channel 1 data history 100 times of data sampling D200 to D299 Channel 2 data history 100 times of data sampling D300 to D399 Channel 3 data history 100 times of data sampling D400 to D499 Channel 4 data history 100 times of data sampling B 54 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function 2 Example of sequence program Initia
203. he scanning time of the PLC can be shortened dvr onexs For a detailed description of the abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 refer to Subsection 5 4 10 1 If BFM 127 K209 initial value Specified data register Description D209 Abrupt change detection status data in BFM 27 2 Caution regarding abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify such a data register Be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 and the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 The data set in BFM 127 will be retained in the EEPROM IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O id dvp nex4 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 day dav O Sian TI uoHONSsUl did 88 ONS B 43 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 24 BFM 128 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K210 Numeric data type Decimal K U
204. hen the output mode is 4 The dotted line is for mode 2 SS Analog output S A 0 gt 32000 Digital input FX2N 5A Insulation method e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC A 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 3 Analog Input Output Mixture 4 3 2 Specifications FXoN 3A FXON 3A Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Number of input output points 2ch 1ch Analog input output range OV to 10V DC OV to 5V DC Input resistance 200kQ Input resistance 250Q 4mA to 20mA DC OV to 10V DC OV to 5V DC External load 1k to 1MQ 4mA to 20mA DC External load 500Q ame av ama put 15V 60mA ffset 2 2 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 Offset OV to 1V OmA to 4mA OV to 1V 4mA ee If the digital value is 250 If the digital value is 250 f the digital value is inthe digital values cam 5V to 10V 20mA 40007 4000 5V to 10V 20mA
205. ied For each analog product use this manual for details on wiring setup details example programs and troubleshooting methods A 32 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment Common Items 5 2 Description of Related Manuals 5 2 Description of Related Manuals The main manuals necessary for the use of analog products are described below These manuals are classified into two groups manuals necessary for the PLC main unit the manuals necessary for analog products The manuals specified as separately supplied are not supplied with the products Other manuals are supplied with the corresponding products sua UOWWOD dvr onexs WW 5 2 1 Analog control manuals The following manuals are common manuals that can be used for any of the FX3u FX3UuC Series analog products Supplied with Manual type Document RTs Description yP number separately P supplied FX3U FX3UC Series PLC FX3u FX3UC Series Separately This manual describes the details of the analog products User s Manual JY997D16701 supplied of the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Analog Control Edition This manual 5 2 2 Manuals related to FX3u FX3uc Series PLC main unit For a detailed description of the commands to be used for the sequence programs refer to the programming manual For a detailed description of the hardware such as wiring of the PLC main unit refer to the User s
206. ies are compatible e Check the version number of FX3UuC 32MT LT The version number should be 1 30 or later gt For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power TC ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of TC ADP is on 2 Thermocouple cable Use the insulation type thermocouple and connect the thermocouple using the compensating lead wire In addition separate the cable of the thermocouple from the other power cables or inductive cables 3 To use thermocouple type J To use thermocouple type J shortcircuit the J type terminals If these terminals are not shortcircuited the temperature measurement data cannot be read out correctly gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 5 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for TC ADP are correctly used 1 Selection of type K or J Check if the special device for type K J selection is correctly set Turn off the device to select thermocouple type K Turn on the device to select thermocouple type J 2 Temperature measurement Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 3 Number of averaging time Verify if the set number of averaging time is with
207. ifications a gt x lt E Z gt o U Item Voltage input Current input D Analog input OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC n range Input resistance 194 KQ Input resistance 250 Q ES A Maximum 0 5V 15V 2mA 30mA F absolute input 3 Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10V 4000 10uA 16mA 1600 E 0 5 50mV for full scale of 10V when 0 5 80uA for full scale of 16mA when x ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C E Total accuracy gt 1 0 100mV for full scale of 10V when 1 0 1601A for full scale of 16mA when e ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C 83 U A D conversion 200 us The data will be updated at every scan time time gt For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 F A A E AN A RAI E AE z E E ADBO0P TT 1640 sa 4000 7 1600 3 Input 5 G characteristics 2 2 3 3 o 2 a 52 a a g5 0 gt 10V Approx 0 4mA gt 20mA Approx Analog input 10 2V Analog input 20 4mA The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog input area Channels are not insulated from each other Insulation method Number of I O 0 point This number is not related to the maxi
208. igital filter function should be disabled default 2 5 Device assignment F Device Description 5 DO A D converted digital value for channel 1 O D1 A D converted digital value for channel 2 33 D2 A D converted digital value for channel 3 BS D3 A D converted digital value for channel 4 G v 2 Example of sequence program Initial pulse 22 MBDD2 FNC 12 H3300 U1 GO Input modes of channels 1 gS RUN monitor mov amp to 4 will be specified 1 M8000 C70 K50 FNC 16 For channels 1 and 2 the number of averaging time will be set to 10 es The digital filter function of channels 1 and 2 will be disabled The digital values set for channels 1 through 4 will be read out to DO to D3 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs After the input mode specified if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and the waiting time TO K50 2 To use the default value set for the digital filter function it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program B 51 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions This section describes a program that us
209. iii dad Asa ii A 33 5 2 2 Manuals related to FX3U FX3UC Series PLC main Unit ooocccccncnnnccccccccnccoaccnncnonononnnoncnancnnnnnnnnns A 33 5 2 3 Manuals of analog UNI S oomoiii a ads eee A 34 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual A 36 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 Outline B 3 11 Qutline Of FUNCHONS a aio iaa o eine die ate Re i e ake B 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ooooconoccccnnnccccnnnoccnnonnoccnnnnnoconnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnns B 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 2 ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeess B 5 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool ccccsecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeees B 5 2 Specifications B 6 2 1 Generic Specifications ooooccccnnnocooccnnnccononnononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnn no nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn rn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns B 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeseceaeeeesceaeeeeeseeeesesceeeeeseueeeeseseeees B 6 2 3 Performance Specifications ccccceccecccceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeaceeeeceaeeceeecaeecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseneeeess B 7 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseneeeeeseeeeessaeeeeeeneeeeeseneeees B 8 3 Wiring B 10 3 1 Terminal Arr
210. ime Channel data type Update timing BFM 2 to 5 BFM 6 to 9 Immediate data eae 0 will be set and the Each time the A D conversion is performed the 0 or less 9 The digital filter umber of averaging time data will be updated will not be used setting error b10 of BEM The update timing will be as follows 29 will TES a Update time 500us 1x Number of 0 The digital filter diate data selected channels will not be used Each time the A D conversion is performed the 1 1 to 1600 Immediate data data will be updated The digital filter The digital filter function will The update timing will be as follows will be used be used Update time 5ms x Number of selected channels Each time the A D conversion is performed the data will be updated 2 to 400 Average data The update timing will be as follows Update time 500us 1x Number of selected channels 401 to 4095 O The digital filter Average data Each time the A D conversion is performed for 4096 or more will not be used Average data 4096 will be set and the number of averaging time setting error b10 of BFM 29 will occur 1 500us represents the A D conversion time However if one of the channels uses the digital filter function the A D conversion time will be 5 ms for all the channels the set number of averaging time the data will be updated The update timing will be as follows Update time 500us x Number of selec
211. in the PLC due to the influence of noise x lt amp T gt z gt o U m ES Cc A U T gt U TU Do not lay close or bundle with the main circuit high voltage power line or load line Otherwise effects of noise or surge induction are likely to take place Keep a safe distance of more than 100 mm 3 94 from the above when wiring Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not ground at the same point as high voltage lines Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may dady Ld QYY NEX4 TI cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product Y The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 E Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem 3 Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires 33 Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed Q de uononsul did 88 ON4 E 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of PT ADP are arranged as follow
212. in the specified range The number of averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set number of averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 4 Error status Check that no error is detected on TC ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check 5 5 Check the following items for a program Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared the b6 and the b7 should be turned off using the program Check of storage devices Check that different digital values are not stored in the same device in the other programs Error Status Check If an error occurs on TC ADP the corresponding bit will be turned on Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data in bO channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Number of averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data in b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 TC ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data in b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC ADP commu
213. ineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices 3 All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual e This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life e Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric e This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system e When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover pleas
214. ing 3 lt Step response method gt was not executed correctly a 6752 anaes Improper auto tuning operation Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change cycle or set a larger value to the input filter constant B After changing the setting execute auto tuning again gt x lt lt Limit cycle method gt 6753 Abnormal output set value for auto tuning E a o amp ULV upper limit lt LLV lower limit oe is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not S started gt lt Limit cycle method gt Check whether the target settings are correct 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning SHPV lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status started gt Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Verify that devices occupied by PID instruction are not overwritten overwritten in the program lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not started gt The auto tuning time is too long Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and the lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check whether the result is improved lt Limit cycle method gt 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement time ton gt
215. ing grounding Caution regarding connection of power supply line e Ground the terminal to the class D grounded power supply line 1000 or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3uc Series PLC 4AD ADP FX3ucC Series PLC Main unit FX2nc Series PLC Input extension block Power Power crossover connector connector Power connector Terminal block L Class D 24V DC grounding Cautions regarding connection of power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC e Ground the terminal to the class D grounded power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit C 12 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 4 Analog Input Line 3 4 Analog Input Line For analog input voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel If current input is selected 4AD ADP Terminal 4 block 147kQ ch EST n vO gt MOCO TE gt id E Comal 47 EA Connection of external power supply line E 24 voc EY E 1 Class D grounding VO I cho represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded
216. inued gt Check whether the target settings are correct 6749 Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output lt Alarm output is not given gt PID operation is continued gt variation alarm set value Set value lt 0 Check whether the target settings are correct lt Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is started gt When auto tuning was started the difference between the zStebrespohs method measured value and the target value was 150 or less 6750 p resp e When auto tuning was started the difference between the Improper auto tuning result measured value and the target value was 1 3 or more Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started gt The operation direction estimated from the measured value at 6751 lt Step response method gt the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation Auto tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and measured value and then execute auto tuning again FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction FNC 88 6 1 Error Codes Error Error description Action Q code P S 3 lt Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is not started gt s Because the set value fluctuated during auto tuning auto tun
217. ion refer to the FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000 when analog output range is 1 to 5V to 0 to 10000 1 Output characteristics Voltage output characteristics 5 Digital value characteristics product specifications E p to be changed o a 375 5 i TRO 2 i BSS Yai E i a 5 Y axis D i folge Ko i Bo 2 5 o I SOD lt e BOO ob gt n gt 2 5V 400 i H 1V i 0 400 2000 4000 ol gt 10000 gt Digital value input Desired digital value 2 Example of program For example create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog special adapter Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode Sets the output holding function for channel 1 Program for setting scaling instruction table data ESO ption EE Device Number of points Sets the number of points the number of points D50 X Digital value of specified D51 Start coordinate start point on X axis H point Y Digital value of desired D A D52 coordinate conversion start point i X Digital value of specified end point Y Digital value of desired D A FNC 12 FNC 259 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored 3 Cautions regarding programming e GX Develo
218. ise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min A voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal Comply with JEM 1201 Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Greundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less 7 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts atmosphere Working Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 3 altitude 4 If PT ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 2 Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment Pug equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Nat allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 6 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use PT ADP PT ADP may malfunction FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Items Specification A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 50mA driving power It is necessary to connect the 24V DC power supply to the terminal block 5V DC 15mA
219. itch the temperature unit to To switch the temperature unit to ode C for the 1st adapter Fahrenheit F for the 2nd adapter 01 8000 m 18260 Normally OFF Normally ON F 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 4 Selection of Type K or J 44 Selection of Type K or J g 3 Oo Turn on the type J or off the type K selection special auxiliary relay to select the thermocouple type J or K for TC ADP E The thermocouple type will be selected for all the channels at the same time To select the thermocouple type use the following special auxiliary relays B Special auxiliary relay P ES Description 9 1st 2nd 3rd 4th U Selection of type K or J M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF Type K ON Type J 1 Example of program 1 To select thermocouple type K for the 2 To select thermocouple type J for the 1st adapter 2nd adapter M8001 E M8000 627 Normally OFF Normally ON 4 5 Temperature Measurement The temperature data input in TC ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table IM covvarnos O aav ave nexs O x Special data register JE Description gt 1st 2nd 3rd 4th E D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data 3 D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the ch
220. l Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 8 BFM 22 Convenient function setting Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Turn on each bit b0 to b8 of BFM 22 to enable the function assigned to each bit refer to the following table Turn off each bit to disable the function of each bit 1 Function assigned to each bit of BFM 22 Bit No Function Description Reference The channel data BFM 10 to 13 peak data BFM 101 to 104 111 to 114 and data history BFM 200 to 6999 will be subject to change the addition data BFM 61 to 64 will be Subsection bO Data addition function added to the measurement data 5415 When setting the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 or the iV upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 add the addition data BFM 61 to 64 to the error data to be set If the A D conversion data of a channel is outside the range set b1 Upper lower limit by the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 and the upper limit Subsection detection function error data BFM 81 to 84 the result will be written in BFM 5 4 16 26 as the upper lower limit error status data When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous value and the new value is A Abrupt change Subsection b2 detection function larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in 54 17 BFM
221. ld bs gs Manufacturer Model straight Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 Wiring 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of TC ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to FX3u Series PLC 1 To use the external power FX3u Series PLC Main unit 2 To use 24V DC power of PLC FX3u Series PLC Main unit Terminal block 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of power supply line e Ground the terminal to the class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3uc Series PLC FX2NC FX3uc Series PLC Series PLC Main unit Input extension block Power Power crossover connector connector Power connector Termina block L Class D 24V DC grounding Cautions regarding connection of power supply line e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC e Ground the terminal to the class D grounding power supply line 100 or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel
222. le PLC Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 20 or later After April 2004 ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt 1 Version number check method Check the D8001 special data register to determine the version number of the compatible PLC D8001 version number PC type and Le Version data Example Ver 1 00 PC type Example 24 FX2n FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series 2 Description of production number A label is affixed to the right side of the product On this label check the number written in SERIAL to determine the date month and year of production MI aav varnexs O aav ave nexs Example Mi FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 gt x lt MITSUBISHI Porn 2 MODEL FXsu 48MR ES 5 pe 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W 57 OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS 1 SERIAL 1 570001 F gt x lt Aus usteo som IND cont Ea CE e Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION amp MADE IN JAPAN PY z _ 59 U T Control number G Ln Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September 3 X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year Fa a g8 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool Use the programming tool having the following version number to create programs for 4AD ADP of the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC
223. le Power crossover cable Class D grounding 24V DC FX2nc 100BPCB Power cable 3 2 3 Cautions regarding connection of power cables e Ground the terminal to the class D grounding line 100 or less together with the ground terminal of the main unit To perform crossover wiring to connect the power line from 4AD to a succeeding extension block remove the resin cover from the power crossover connector using nippers B 13 Slay UOWUWUOD gt dvr onexs la avt nexa FT dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O day dav O Sian TT uononasu did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 Wiring 3 3 Cable Connection to Input Terminal and Tightening Torque 3 3 Cable Connection to Input Terminal and Tightening Torque To connect to the desired unit use a cable having a conductor s of size AWG22 20 To use a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable and then twist the core before connection To use a single wire cable peel the cover off the cable before connection 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size stranded Tightening Termination single wire torque 0 3mm to 0 5mm AWG22 e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the Single wire E to 20 cable and then twist the core before connection E e To connect a single wire cable peel the cover off Double wire 0 3mm AWG22 the
224. le wire cable Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude Do not solder plate the end of the cable e To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Termination of cable end Manufacturer Model Caulking tool Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX UD6 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a purchased small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure Led se Manufacturer Model straight Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m gt 2 5MM 0 01 0 09 C 11 avy onexs OD sweyuowwog gt id ave nex4 PT aav varnexs O aav ave nex day dav O Sion TI uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of 4AD ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to the FX3u Series PLC 1 To use the External power supply 2 To use 24V DC power of PLC 4AD ADP 4AD ADP 15V FX3u Series PLC Main unit FX3u Series PLC Main unit Terminal block Terminal block Class D 24V DC ground
225. lue work as shown in the graph below x The upper limit and lower limit of the output value can mitigate increase of the integral item in the PID control E A oss ee A gt When using the upper limit and lower limit of the output value make sure to set 1 bit 2 to OFF aa 80 Set item Setting setting range 3 bit2 Output variation alarm Make sure to set it to OFF Output variation alarm 1 ACT ON Used a bits Output value upper lower limit setting OFF Not used 5 52 ale Output value O gs When the upper limit and lower These values 2 limit of output value are not set i not output ATS 22 Output value upper limit 23 Output value lower lina These values are not output When the upper limit and lower limit of output value are set Time G 11 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 3 Input filter S3 2 Setting range 0 to 99 PID control Proportional operation integral operation and differential operation The input filter a is a software filter to reduce the fluctuation of the measured value PV caused by noise By setting this time constant of the filter according to the control target characteristics and noise level the effect of noise can be reduced Ifthe input filter value is too small the filter effect is small e Ifthe input filter value is too large the i
226. m to read out the temperature measurement data The following program will store the temperature measurement data C from channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter to D100 and D101 respectively The number of averaging time is set to 1 immediate data for channel 1 and 5 for channel 2 RST D8268 7 M8002 M8001 M8002 M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 E MOV i FNC 12 D8261 D101 MOV Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C Sets the number of averaging time to 1 for channel 1 data Sets the number of averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 temperature measurement data in the D100 Stores the average value of the channel 2 temperature measurement data in the D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or PID instruction E 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper di
227. mit error data Y003 Output of channel 2 upper limit error data Y004 Output of channel 3 lower limit error data Y005 Output of channel 3 upper limit error data Y006 Output of channel 4 lower limit error data Y007 Output of channel 4 upper limit error data Y010 Output of channel 1 over scale lower limit data Y011 Output of channel 1 over scale upper limit data Y012 Output of channel 2 over scale lower limit data Y013 Output of channel 2 over scale upper limit data Output Y014 Output of channel 3 over scale lower limit data YO15 Output of channel 3 over scale upper limit data Y016 Output of channel 4 over scale lower limit data Y017 Output of channel 4 over scale upper limit data Y20 Output of error detection signal Y21 Output of setting error detection signal DO A D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A D converted digital value of channel 3 D3 A D converted digital value of channel 4 D100 Upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register D101 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register D102 Error status data automatic transfer to data register B 52 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions 2 Example of sequence program Initial pulse M8002 l FNC 12 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be A H3300 U1
228. mories BFM oooonocccconcccconcocononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn near nn n naar nn nnnnnn ninas B 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories ccccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaceeeeeneeeesecaeeeeseeeeesesaeeeesseeeeseenaeeees B 25 5 4 1 BFM 0 Input mode Specification ooooonninccnnnnicnnnnncnnonccnnnrrnnc non non nrn cnn nr r ronca B 25 5 4 2 BFM 2 to 5 Number Of averaging tiM nnooconnncnnnncnnocccnnnnonncnonn cnn nr rncnnnn cnn rrn cnn rr rn B 26 5 4 3 BFM 6 to 9 Digital filter SettiN9 oooonnnninnnidinnnicnnnnnnnoccccnnncrannncrcnnnrrrcnnnr nr rra B 27 5 4 4 BFM 10 to 13 Channel data oooooococonicconncccnncocccconcnnncccnnnnn arc nnnr cnn rca B 28 5 4 5 BFM 19 Data change prOhibit oooocooccconncccnnonccononoccnonrnccnno non naidaan aaa aaae aai aeiaai B 29 5 4 6 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status oooonnnocnnnicnnnncconnconcnnoncnons B 29 5 4 7 BFM 21 Input characteristics Writing eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeseneeeesaeeesenaeeneees B 29 5 4 8 BFM 22 Convenient function Setting ee ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseaaeeeseeeeeenaeeeenenaeeeees B 30 5 4 9 BFM 26 Upper lower limit error Status eee eee eeeeeeeeeneee cesses nan cc nano nnn nn nn nora rr B 32 5 4 10 BFM 27 Abrupt change detection Status
229. ms for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 1 Example System and operation 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method The following is an example of a program for the operation application system shown below 5 1 Example System and operation awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt System configuration Temperature sensor Shielded compensating Thermocouple A conductor FX3U 32MR ES Temperature chamber Electric heater X010 Auto tuning command 1 Since turning on off is frequently carried out be sure to use the X011 PID control command transistor outputs Setting contents x wo E A gt Q gt iw TU M 3s E iw P gt U TE 3 E gt y Y During auto During PID Item tuning control re q __ SSS SSS AA II a Alea ee 3 Target value 500 50 C 500 50 C TU Sampling time Ts 3000 ms 500 ms F Input filter cx 2 70 70 x Differential gain KD 5 0 0 2 z D o 2000 2000 ba E Output value upper limit 22 2 seconds 0 g 5 Output value lower limit 23 0 0 Input variation alarm bit 1 of 1 Not provided Not provided 3 Operation direction F a 5 ED Output variation alarm bit 2 of 1 Not provided Not provided ae ZS Output value upper lower limit setting bit 5 of 1 Provided Provided 23 According to ia Output value CD 1800 operation 1 Operation of the electric heater 1 During PID c
230. mum number of input output points of the PLC occupied points C 7 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time This section describes the A D conversion time AID conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3Uu 4AD ADP FX3u 4AD ADP n th 1st FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start AID command conversion Digital value writing 200us 4ch A D conversion start END instruction AID command Digital value writin 200us 4ch igital value writing 2 A D conversion during stoppage of PLC Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter 4 AID conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written in the special data registers END instruction execution time will
231. n a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION C 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input C 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3U 4AD ADP referred to as 4AD ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions FX3U 4AD ADP is an analog special adapter Connect FX3U 4AD ADP to the FX3u FX3Uc Series PLC to load the voltage current data of 4 channels 1 Up to 4 units of 4AD ADP can be connected to the PLC including the other analog special adapters 2 Either voltage input or current input can be specified for each channel 3 A D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written in the special data register of the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC System Point and section to be referred to 4 adapters maximum including other Pe Eaa a EEL L RA Number of connectable analog special adapters units gt
232. n accident 1 An emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal and reverse rotations and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC When the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case The output current of the service power supply for sensor varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If overload is applied the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case When some sort of error occurs in a relay triac or transistor of the output unit output may be kept on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such cases CAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line Do not lay the control line near them As a rule lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or
233. n execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters Temperature Measurement To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on E 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 5 Temperature Measurement A 3 Wiring This chapter describes wiring of PT ADP Observe the following caution to wire PT ADP ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt WIRING PRECAUTIONS OD ANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock and damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system During the wiring work do not let cutting chips and wire chips enter ventilation slits Make sure to observe the precautions below in order to prevent any damage to a machine or any accident which might be caused by abnormal data written
234. n number Remarks GX Developer e SWLID5C GPPW J e SWLID5C GPPW E Ver SW8 P or later Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3uc If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible E 5 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt ddv var nexs J ddv avr nexs O 1d dWy NeXW4 day dav O Sian TI uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for PT ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient f 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 4 to 158 F when stored temperature Relative A gt humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Compliant with EN 68 2 6 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm Vibration A 0035 10 times of testing in resistance DIN Rail Mounting i coc aut X Ya 57 150 4 9 pi and Z axis directions 10 to 57 E 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9 8 Shock Compliant with EN 68 2 27 resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance No
235. nding terminal in the main unit Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system During the wiring work do not let cutting chips and wire chips enter ventilation slits Make sure to observe the precautions below in order to prevent any damage to a machine or any accident which might be caused by abnormal data written in the PLC due to the influence of noise Do not lay close or bundle with the main circuit high voltage power line or load line Otherwise effects of noise or surge induction are likely to take place Keep a Safe distance of more than 100 mm 3 94 from the above when wiring Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not ground at the same point as high voltage lines Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed 3 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS DANGER Do not t
236. nels Range Resolution Function bnce 3 Voltage current input Voltage 0 32mV Mixed use of voltage and current B 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits inputs is possible v FX3UC 4AD 4ch The offset gain can be adjusted B S Current 1 254A The sampling function is amp 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits incorporated Voltage 0 32mV Mixed use of voltage and current 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits inputs is possible C FX2NC 4AD 4ch The offset gain can be adjusted 1 Current 1 254A The sampling function is 2s 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits incorporated E Voltage 0 63mV Mixed use of voltage current E 10V to 10V DC with sign 15 bits and thermocouple is possible 3 FX2N 8AD 2 8ch The offset gain can be adjusted 1 Current 2 5 UA The sampling function is D 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 14 bits incorporated z Voltage 5mV is 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits Mixed use of voltage and current El FX2N 4AD 4ch inputs is possible 4 3 Current 1OLA The offset gain can be adjusted v 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 11 bits E Voltage 2 5mV Mixed use of voltage and current E OV to 10V DC 12bits i i i EX2N 2AD 2 2ch inputs is possible l 4 aj Current 4uA The offset gain can be adjusted E AmA to 20mA DC 12bits Common to 2 input channels 5 gt Voltage current output z Voltage 5mV F 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits Mixed use of voltage and current FX2NC 4DA 2 4ch inputs is possible
237. nication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data in b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value of thermocouple type K is not in the range from 110 C to 1010 C or the temperature measurement value of thermocouple type J is not in the range from 110 C to 610 C Or the line between TC ADP and the thermocouple is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office Number of averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The number of averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 2 Remedy Check that the number of averaging time is correctly set for each channel F 23 awonexa OD sway uowuoo gt IM aavvornex O aav ave nexs O
238. nitial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H If the input analog value is out of the A D conversion range the following operation will be performed e If analog input value lt lower limit value in A D conversion range The over scale lower limit bit will be turned on e If analog input value lt upper limit value in A D conversion range The over scale upper limit bit will be turned on AID conversion range Input type AID conversion range Voltage input 10 2V to 10 2V Current input 20 4mA to 20 4mA 2 Assignment of each bit of BFM 28 Bit No Channel number Description bO a Over scale lower limit b1 Over scale upper limit b2 a Over scale lower limit b3 Over scale upper limit b4 zp Over scale lower limit b5 Over scale upper limit b6 Over scale lower limit Booo A an Over scale upper limit b8 to b15 Not used Caution regarding use of over scale status data Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Write H0000 in BFM 28 as the over scale status data e Even if over scale is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will continuously be updated Over scale status data automatic transfer function b7 of BFM 22 If the over scale status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 128 the data in BFM 28 can be transferred to the specified data register
239. nnel 1 of the 1st y Normally analog special adapter to 1 E gt Sets the number of averaging F time for channel 2 of the 1st go analog special adapter to 5 e 38 52 gs amp C 17 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 Programming 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected on 4AD ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Description D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors For a detailed description of error statuses refer to Section 6 5 Bit Description Bit Description bO Detection of over scale in channel 1 b5 Number of averaging time setting error b1 Detection of over scale in channel 2 b6 4AD ADP hardware error b2 Detection of over scale in channel 3 b7 4AD ADP communication data error b3 Detection of over scale in channel 4 b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If 4AD ADP hardware error b6 or 4AD ADP communication data error b7 is
240. nput area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O occupied points 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC A 30 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 6 FX2N 2LC Specifications FX2N 2LC 1 2 Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 2ch Thermocouple type K J R S E T B N PL IlI WRe5 26 U and L input signal 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s Pt100 and JPt100 Examples Examples Type K Type K Rated temperature range 100 C to 1300 C 100 F to 2400 F e Type J Type J 100 0 C to 800 0 C 100 F to 2100 F Examples Examples e Type K Type K Digital output 100 to 1300 100 to 2400 e Type J Type J 1000 to 8000 100 to 2100 Resolution 1 C or 0 1 C 1 F or 0 1 F a Ambient temperature S i 0 3 C 1digi 5 345 C 0 3 C 1 digit for full scale o Ambient temperature s o E 0 to 55 C 0 7 C 1 digit for full scale Cold junction temperature compensation error 1 0 C 2 0 C if the input value is in the range from 100 C to 150 C 3 0 C if the input value is in the range from 150 C to 200 C Time required for conversion
241. nput mode 1 Reference offset gain value and initial value set at delivery Offset Gain Input mode BFM 0 Channels 1 to 4 BFM 41 to Channels 1 to 4 BFM 51 to 44 54 Set er Reference a Reference oe Description Initial value Initial value value value value Voltage input 0 OV to 10V 32000 to 32000 p omv 18099 nOnOIY Voltage input 1 AoVv to 10V 4000 to 4000 9 my a SCO Voltage input 0 OmV 5000 5000mV 2 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 impossible impossible impossible impossible 3 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 0 4000mA 16000 20000mA Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 0 4000mA 4000 20000mA Current input 4000 4000mA 20000 20000mA 5 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible Current input 6 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 p oma 18099 til Current input 7 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 o Oma 4000 20000m Current input 0 OmA 20000 20000mA 8 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible B 36 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buf
242. nput range 20 to 20mA Analog input range 20 to 20mA Digital output range 16000 to 16000 Digital output range 4000 to 4000 ee Digital output range 20000 to 20000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Offset gain adjustment Possible gt Offset gain adjustment Impossible gt x lt Digital value Digital value Digital value 16320 20400 r 16000 lt 20000 lt 1X ix 19 E l i O E Iot ISF 28 128 Current e Current i s Input _20MA __0 j Input _ 20mA__0 H Approx la avt nexa PMI aav varnexa O aav ave nexs O day dav O Sion TI uononasu did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 A 3 Wiring This chapter describes wiring of 4AD Observe the following caution to wire 4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock and damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Per
243. nput response is bad Because the input filter a is effective to the target value SV all of the proportional operation integral operation and differential operation are affected Pulse input by noise Actual measured value PV Input amplitude Measured Input amplitude value PV processed by input filter processed by input filter Vi 1 G 12 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 4 Proportional gain KP S3 3 ER e 3 Setting range 1 to 32767 3 PID control Proportional operation g In the proportional operation the output MV increases in proportion to the deviation difference between the g target value SV and the measured value PV B This proportion is called proportional gain Kp and expressed in the following relational expression Output MV Proportional gain KP x Deviation EV ES O The reciprocal of the proportional gain KP is called proportional band is As the proportional gain KP is larger as shown in the example below the motion to let the measured value SV be nearer the target value PV becomes stronger Example 1 Proportional operation P operation in heating backward operation c AO gt lt 4 E gt Target value PV E g gt Measured value SV 3 5 KP3 A Remaining deviation 3 2 d Pa Proportional gain d E Kp2 7
244. ns G 6 3 Parameter G 7 3 1 Parameter List SI LO SI F28 ct nci ee a e ed o add G 7 3 2 Details of Parameters ccccccccecccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeeseeseaeeseesneeeseneeeenees G 9 3 27 Sampling time TS 93 arnari eaea a a tee degdee ee deteids Alas ieteo ed aa aai ARR G 9 3 2 2 Operation setting ACT S3 41 oo ee cece ceeeeeseeeeceeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeesnaeeeeeaeeesesaeesseeeensaeenenaees G 10 3 2 3 Input filter 0 SS 2 oo eee E EETA E EE E E E G 12 3 2 4 Proportional gain KP Sd Aia tasar eared G 13 3 2 5 Integral time Tl SS 4 ececceccecceeecesceeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeseaesaaseaeseeseaesaeseaeseeseseteeeeaeeeeeeaes G 13 3 2 6 Differential gain KD S3 5 ceccccccesceecceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaecaeecaecsaecaaeeaecaeceaeseeseeseeseseeeeeeneeneeeaes G 15 3 2 7 Differential time TD S3 6 ececccecceeceescesceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaecaaeeaeceeceaeceeseaeseeseeescaeeeesnseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes G 15 3 2 8 Alarm output flag SI F24 ainia A aia G 17 4 Auto Tuning G 18 4 1 Limit Cycle Method cccccececccceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaceseneaaeeeeecaaeeeesecaeeseeseaeesetsaeeeesseeeenneeeetees G 18 4 1 1 Parameters set in auto tuning of limit cycle Method cccceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees G 18 A 2AUtO tuning procedi tt iii G 19 4 1 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control limit cycle method
245. nual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION E 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input E 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3U 4AD PT ADP referred to as PT ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions FX3U 4AD PT ADP is an analog special adapter Connect FX3U 4AD PT ADP to the FX3U FX3UC Series PLC to load the temperature data from the 4 channel platinum resistance thermometer 1 Up to 4 units of PT ADP can be connected to the PLC including other analog special adapters 2 After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 measurement of temperature will be possible 3 The temperature measurement data will be automatically written in the special data registers of the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC 4 ad
246. o de di dee al de o e E 12 3 3 1 To connect to FX3U Series PLC ooooonoccccccinococcconccnnnoncnocnnnnononcnnncnnnoncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnn rca nnnannnnncncinns E 12 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3UC Series PLC oooonooccccncnnccoccccconnnononcnnncnnnoncnncnnnnnncnnnnnanoncnnnnnnnnnnnncnncanns E 12 3 4 Selection of Platinum Resistance Thermometer SeNsSOl cccseccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeees E 13 3 5 Wiring of Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeees E 13 O 16 0 a0 IATE rc te e rene ee E 13 4 Programming E 14 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data ccccccccccssssseeeeeececseseseeneeeeeeeeecessnaeeeeeeesseesnaeeeeeeeeseestaaeees E 14 4 2 List of Special Devices ccccecccccccceecsteeeeeeeecsesnseeeeeeeesceecneeeeeeeeeseceenaeeeeeeeesesensseeeeeeeessestaeeees E 15 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit occccnnccccncccnnnooooonnnnnncnnnonnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos E 15 4 4 Temperature Measure Met cococococococonononoconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnes E 16 4 5 Number of Averaging Time Arite etones eroto treedt deriet E 17 A 6 Error Status sic AA ere Slaten eA eA ee elie a a dee ie E 18 Arf Model Code tando et a ae te Ae ok le Me le el e e E 20 4 8 Example of Basic Program ccccccccccsssssscceceeeceessneeeeeeeeecsesseeeeeeeeeeseensaeeeeeeeeseseneaeeeeeeessesenaeeees E 20
247. of Performance Specifications sua UOWWOD The analog product performance specifications are shown in the following tables Select the optimal product for your equipment dvr onexs WW 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 1 FX3uU 4AD ADP c 2 FX3U 4AD ADP amp Specifications E Voltage input Current input E Number of input points 4ch i Analod inputrande OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC D g inp g Input resistance 194 KQ Input resistance 250 Q z Absolute maximum output 0 5V 15V 2mA 30mA E Offset S Impossible to change Impossible to change 5 Gain d Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary E Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 10u4A 16mAx1 1600 x S Ambient temperature g 2545 C p 0 5 50mV for full scale of 10V 0 5 80uA for full scale of 16mA 5 JE ES d T a 5 sree ae 1 0 100mV for full scale of 10V 1 0 4160 A for full scale of 16mA F l 7 Time required for A D conversion 200us The data will be updated at every scan time 5 ES is BB Approx 1040 TU 4000 aca E 16009 7 G e I lt 3 5 i iS 5 H 5 a S ae 2 iS Z Input characteristics 3 5 3 Ze 3 bie 8 Ze big D S EE a 4 a ror 0 10V 0 4mA gt 20mA Analog input Analog input The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels
248. of error The number of averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 Remedy Check that the number of averaging time is correctly set for each channel 4AD ADP error b6 Description of error 4AD ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to 4AD ADP Also check that 4AD ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 4AD ADP communication error b7 Description of error A communication error is detected between 4AD ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that 4AD ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office C 24 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output A B FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers i C User s Manual Analog Control Edition gt FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output z M dav var nex4 1d dWy NeXW4 day dav O Sian TI uononsul did 88 ON4 Foreword This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation method for FX3u 4DA ADP special adapter 4 channel analog output and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place
249. olution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30MA 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode 5 If 1 or more channels use the thermocouple input s the input voltage current data conversion speed will be 1 ms X number of selected channels A 16 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 5 FX2nN 4AD FX2N 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range ee DE eR oe ae g Input resistance 200kQ Input resistance 250 2 Absolute maximum output 15V 32mA Offset 5V to 5V 1 2 20mA to 20mA 1 3 Gain 4V to 15V 1 2 16mA to 32mA 1 9 Digital output With sign 12 bits binary With sign 11 bits binary Resolution 5mV 20Vx1 4000 201 A 40mAx1 2000 a Ambient temperature E 7 5 25 5 C o T Ambient temperature 1 0 4001A for full scale of 40mA Of ES 0 to 55 C E10 EZ OD in Tor tullsSealaot 2 OV Same for input of 4mA to 20mA Time required for A D conversion Input characteristics Insulation method Number of I O occupied points Normal conversion
250. on BFM 20 vu Input characteristics writing BFM 21 charge 2090 Subsection 4 as 19 Convenient functions BFM 22 O er Decimal 5 4 5 G Offset data BFM 41 to 44 har rae K2080 v Gain data BFM 51 to 54 e Automatic transfer to data register as specification BFM 125 to 129 E e Data history sampling time setting BFM 198 gs Initialization function Set K1 in this buffer memory to perform A Subsection ay initialization At the completion of initialization Kotor Ki dd Decimal 5 4 6 KO will be automatically set Input characteristics writing Write the offset gain value as the input Mead Subsection 21 characteristics At the completion of writing 3 H0000 mal 547 H0000 b0 to b3 OFF will be automatically ns set 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data 2 To specify the input mode of each channel set each digit using hexadecimal numbers 0 to 8 and F 3 Use bO to b3 B 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 3 List of Buffer Memories BFM BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Convenient function setting Convenient functions Automatic send A A 2271 function data addition upper lower limit 2 H0000 at delivery aos
251. on Number of averaging time for 4 5 D8266 Deere D9256 D8296 channel 3 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAN Number of averaging time for D926 D321 mene D929 channel 4 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAY D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W Era D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 20 R T 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit Turn on Fahrenheit F or off centigrade C the special auxiliary relay of PT ADP to switch the temperature unit To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F 1 Example of program 1 To switch the temperature unit to centigrade C 2 To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit for the 1st adapter for the 2nd adapter M8001 M8000 1 M8260 Normally OFF Normally ON E 15 ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt x lt amp T gt z gt U U m ES Cc A T gt U TU 1d dWy N XW4 dav dav O Sian TI uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 4 Temperature Measurement 4 4 Temperature Measurement The temperature data input in PT ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that s
252. on Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number 4AD is compatible with the following PLC sw UOULOS gt Compatible PLC Date of production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later August 2004 and later dvr onexs 1 Version number check method Check the D8001 special data register to determine the version number of the compatible PLC D8001 version number PC type and L Version data Example Ver 1 00 PC type Example 24 FX2n FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series 2 Description of production number A label is affixed to the right side of the product On this label check the number written on the right side of SERIAL to determine the date month and year of production IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O MITSUBISHI Procter mn Right side MODELF X3uc 32MT LT y DC24V 7W MAX T SERIAL 53 U T Control number y i Example 1 January 1 to 9 January to E September X October Y November Z December 3 Year Example 2004 last digit of dominical year ba 3 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool G a Use the programming tool with the following version number to create 4AD programs for the FX3uc Series 38 PLC 58 85 Software Compatible version number Remarks GX Developer e SWLID5C GPPW J e SWLID5C GPPW E Ver SW8 P or later Ver 8 13P When selecting the model select
253. on resistance meter Comply with JEM 1201 i Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Grounding 7 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 1 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts atmosphere Working Compliant with IEC61131 2 lt 2000m 2 altitude 4 Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 4 2 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use 4AD 4AD may malfunction 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Specifications A D conversion 24V DC 10 80mA circuit drive power It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the power connector 5V DC 100mA Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to supply the power CPU drive power B 6 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 3 Performance Specifications 8 3 S T a Specifications Item Voltage input Current input A 10V to 10V DC 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC x one 9 Input resistance 200k 2 Input resistance 250Q 5 A Offset 10V to 9V 2 20mA to 17mA 3 Gain
254. onstants in the PID control proportional gain KP integral time TI and differential time TD What is the step response method In this method by giving stepped output from O to 100 to the control system three constants in the PID control are obtained from the operation characteristics maximum ramp R and dead time L acquired from the input value variation 1 The stepped output may be obtained from 0 to 75 or from 0 to 50 Operation characteristics 100 Output value Output value MV 0 Time Input value variation Maximum ramp R k Time s Dead time L 1 s s Operation characteristics and three constants Control type Proportional gain KP Integral time TI lt 100ms Differential time TD x10ms Only proportional 1_ Output value control P operation RL MV Pl control 0 9 Output value 33 L PI operation RL MV PID control 1 2 Output value PID operation RL MV an Sd 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning Execution 1 Countermeasures in program when the input value PV does not change When the input value PV does not change normally due to factors such as wire breakage in an analog input line auto tuning is not finished Detect and avoid such phenomenon by introducing a sequence to monitor the input value or the elapsed time from the start of auto tuning G 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Progra
255. ontrol D502 x 1 ms lt ON duration gt OFF ON ON ON ON ON 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms lt cycle gt 2 During auto tuning When the output is 90 of the maximum output 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms G 23 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control Initial pulse M8002 D500 PID control is X010 after auto tuning FNC 12 xso9 MOV FNC 12 FNC 12 KO D515 _ El H FNC 12 K2000 D532 MOV FNC 12 Ko PLS D533 started MO PID control is X011 without auto tuning Auto tuning setting flag er Auto tuning ON flag M1 FNC 12 K500 D510 MOVP started MO SET M1 K3000 D510 FNC 12 NO 12 Hooso D511 FNC 12 1800 D502 started after auto tuning X010 Initial pulse Meme FNC 79 f KO KO H3303 K1 ree ee ey RUN monitor M8000 FNC 78 f KO K 10 D501 K1 FROM Initial pulse M8002 1 RST D502 PID control is PID control is started without auto tuning X011 H PID control is X11 without auto tuning start
256. ooooonnccnnnncnnocccnonocncnonanannnornc naar cnn nrn cnn nr nrnnn rre B 33 5 41 11 BFMF28 Over scale statUs iii do B 34 4 12 BEMA29 Error status iii da ele B 35 5A TI BEM A0 Model COE ssie genere etenga a pess eserdi adat elaia aiaia sande B 36 5 4 14 BFM 41 to 44 Offset data BFM 51 to 54 Gain data ooooonncccccnnnccnnccnoccnnncncnnccnnnnnnnncnnnno B 36 5 4 15 BFM 61 to 64 Addition data oonoooicccnnininconinconnconnccconcnn aran nnr cnn nn cnn cnn B 37 5 4 16 BFM 71 to 74 Lower limit error setting BFM 81 to 84 Upper limit error setting B 38 5 4 17 BFM 91 to 94 Abrupt change detection value SettidQ ooooocnionnicinnnccnccccnnnoccccnncrnnronnnons B 39 5 4 18 BFM 99 Clearance of upper lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data B 40 5 4 19 BFM 101 to 104 Minimum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Maximum peak value B 40 5 4 20 BFM 109 Minimum peak value resetting BFM 119 Maximum peak value resetting B 41 5 4 21 BFM 125 Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification B 41 5 4 22 BFM 126 Upper lower error status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 42 5 4 23 BFM 127 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register Specificato ss saves doce cvsnessenctees sbeee cone coeeeasiestpoesigy conwestephscteaapensseetsanesapbecnptacsbehlvertseriveceetndoae B 43 5 4 24 B
257. or of the sampling time Ts is from one operation cycle 1 ms to one operation cycle 1 When the sampling time Ts is a small value Fluctuation of the maximum error described above may cause a problem In such a case execute PID instruction in the constant scan mode or program it in a timer interrupt routine 2 When the sampling time is shorter than one operation cycle of the PLC A PID operation error K6740 occurs but the PID operation is executed while the sampling time Ts is equal to the operation cycle of the PLC In such a case use PID instruction in a timer interrupt 16 to 18 executing PID instruction For a detailed description refer to FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied and clear CS3 7 just before IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O Instruction Edition x E gt 2 U 7 is reset S I 000 When the interrupt routine is executed for the 1610 F first time the register for internal processing is cleared by the pulse generation command FNC 88 The PID operation is executed L AvYY NEXA gt So d uononsu did 88 ONS G 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 2 Operation setting ACT S3 1 Setting range OFF forward operation ON backward operation 1 Forward operation or backward operation 1
258. or programming software and handy programming panel Programming software Generic name for Programming software GX Developer Manual Abbreviation generic name Generic name for SWLID5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E programming software packages Description Manual for FX3u hardware Manual for FX3uc hardware FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition This manual is available only in Japanese Programming manual FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic and Applied Instruction Edition A 37 sua uowwog Ovp ONEXA WW 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav dav O Sion TT uoonasu did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual Common Items 5 2 Description of Related Manuals MEMO A 38 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input sua UOWWOD gt dvr onexs FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input dav 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O dav O Sian TI uononsul did 88 ON4 Foreword This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for FX3uC 4AD special extension block 4 channel analog input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Stor
259. ormance Specifications Specifications Item Voltage output Current output Analog output OV to 10 V DC 4mA to 20mA DC range External load 5kQ to 1MQ External load 500Q or less Digital input 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10V 4000 4uA 16mA 4000 0 5 50mV for full scale of 10 V when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C e 1 0 100mV for full scale of 10 V when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C e 0 5 80uA for full scale of 16mA when If the external load resistance Rs is less than ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C ii 5kQ the value calculated from the following 1 0 160uA for full scale of 16mA formula will be added when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C Addition will be 100mV per 1 47x100 0 9 Rs 47 D A conversion 200us The data will be updated at every scan time time gt For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 ELA 1 I I TOV oi 20MA 7 ga oi 5 i i l 1 o i 1 a l I i I Output 2 NES 9 i characteristics 3 ers al 3 be od I T I l Z i I E Ne e lt Ioi 4mA 0 gt 4000 Approx 0 4000 Approx Digital input 4080 Digital input 4080 The photo coupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the driving power supply line from the analog output area Channels are not insulated from each
260. orms D A conversion on the output setting data digital data into analog data and outputs the F analog data y Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data 2 E Special data register ait 3 Description ae 1st 2nd 3rd 4th oe D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data G D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data x D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 output setting data En El Os gs lo 1 Example of program M8000 Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D100 for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter FNC 12 D100 D82 FNC 12 D101 D8261 Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D100 and D101 Normally ON Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D101 for channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter D 17 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 Programming 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status 1 Description of setting If an error is detected on 4DA ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Descrip
261. orque Single wi 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the C ing e wire AWG22 to 20 cable and then twist the core before connection yl A e To connect a single wire cable just peel the cover e 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 off the cable before connection gt 0 22 to 0 25 Rod terminal with insulation sleeve recommended S 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm Nem terminal Rod terminal AWG22 20 Al 0 5 8WH D with insulation Refer to the external view Manufactured by Phoenix Contact pa sleeve of rod terminal shown in the e Caulking tool fa following figure CRIMPFOX UD6 5 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact gt S U mn gt x lt 2 E gt P Y e To directly terminate end of stranded single wire cable Termination of cable end Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude MILLE gt Do not solder plate the end of the cable ae g 0 35 e To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area a the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while 5 referring to the external view ba is Manufacturer Model Caulking tool Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX UD6 Q W 3 Tool E e To tighten terminals use a purchased small sized screwdriver whose 28 head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure aho
262. other Insulation method Numbers of I O A 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC occupied points D 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 4 D A Conversion Time 2 4 D A Conversion Time g 3 o This section describes the D A conversion time 3 1 D A conversion and special data register update timing D A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC B During execution of END instruction the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers a performs D A conversion of the data and updates the analog output data ES O gt tri ae TER FX3u FX3uc Seriese PLC Sequence x program e Digital value iS D A writing O gt o g conversion c o D A conversion 200us start command 4ch END instruction D A Digital value writing j PERSIAN D A conversion 5 200us 4ch start command gt a i 2 D A conversion during stoppage of PLC x If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device the offset value will be output If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be ES latched Just after power on however the offset value will be output until operation begins F x lt 3 If two or more analog special adap
263. ouch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals externally cut off all phases of the power supply Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard Before modifying the program under operation or performing operation for forcible output running or stopping carefully read the manual and sufficiently ensure the safety An operation error may damage the machine or cause accidents Do not change programs in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment such as the programming tool and GOT at the same time Such changes may cause destruction or malfunction of programs in the PLC CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause failures malfunctions or fire For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable turn off power Failure to do so may cause unit failure or malfunctions Make sure to turn off the power before attaching or removing the peripheral equipment function extension board special adaptor or extension block Failure to do so may cause device failure or malfunctions FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition Manual number JY997D16701 Manual revision A 7 2005 Foreword This manual describes the analog f
264. output points of the PLC A 28 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 4 FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 4AD TC Specifications Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch Thermocouple type K or J HUE SMe JIS C 1602 1995 Rated temperature range Type K 100 C to 1200 C Type K 148 F to 2192 F P 981 Type J 100 C to 600 C Type J 148 F to 1112 F Fe Type K 1000 to 12000 Type K 1480 to 21920 Digita output Type J 1000 to 6000 Type J 1480 to 11120 Type K 0 4 C Type K 0 72 F peot Type J 0 3 C Type J 0 54 F Overall accuracy 0 5 for full scale 1 C Time required for conversion Input characteristics 240ms 2 x number of selected channels 412000 Loco 21920 Type K Type K 6000 11120 Type J Type J 0 O 4 1112F 2192F Type J Type K 1480 600 C 1200 C Type J Type K 1000 Insulation method Number of I O occupied points The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC A 29 sua uowwog dvr onexs WW iaavenexs FT dav varnex
265. outside the specified b6 TC ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b2 in channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b3 in channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error la avt nexa FT aav varnexa O aav ave nexs O gt o d 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If TC ADP hardware error b6 or TC ADP communication data error b7 is once detected it is necessary to clear the error status by a program at next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program T z M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST D8268 6 b6 OFF hardware error gt g i Initial pulse O Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error uononsul did 88 ON4 F 19 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 Programming 4 7 Error Status 2 Example of program D8268 0 m D8268 1 D8268 2 m D8268 3 HH D8268 4 ti D8268 5 Ly D8268 6 HH D8268 7 m Channel 1 output data set value error of the 1st adapter Channel 2 output data set value of the 1st adapter Channel 3 output data set value of the 1st adapter Chann
266. ow to set up the system Refer to Chapter 1 o Outline of system e Version number of compatible PLC e Version number of compatible programming tool Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Check of specifications A Specifications e Operation environment Refer to the common e Performance specifications pages e Input characteristics System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the analog control common pages Refer to Chapter 3 e Selection of units Wiring o Wiring e Power supply line e Analog input line Refer to Chapter 4 Analog data reading test program Input mode specification e Input mode specification program for channel 1 through 4 Refer to Chapter 5 Buffer memory e Buffer memory read write method e List of buffer memories Refer to Chapter 6 e Details of buffer memory Buffer memory BFM check Adjustment of input characteristics Adjustment of input characteristics e Input characteristics change procedure Refer to Chapter 7 Program edit e Basic program e Convenient function program Program edit If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting B 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Versi
267. pecial auxiliary relay to switch the input mode of 4AD ADP between the current input mode and the voltage input mode To switch the input mode use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage input M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON Current input M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 1 Example of program To switch the input mode of a channel create a sequence program as follows 1 To switch the input mode of channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to the voltage input mode M8001 M8260 Normally OFF 2 To switch the input mode of channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter to the current input mode M8000 e26 Normally ON C 15 aw onexa OD susy uowuoo gt id ave nex4 PT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs dav dav O stavrnexy TT uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 Programming 4 4 Input Data 4 4 Input Data Numeric data type Decimal K The data converted by 4AD ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table Special data register
268. pecifications Common ltems 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 2 FX3Uu 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Centigrade C Fahrenheit F sua UOWWOD Specifications Number of input points 4ch Thermocouple type K or J dvr onexs WW Input signal JIS C 1602 1995 Rated temperature range i v j EEA a ds dc Digtal output Typ 1000 to 6000 Type 1480 to 1120 Resolution i Ta ie ne f a de peda Overall accuracy 0 5 for full scale 1 C lime required for 200us The data will be updated at every scan time x wo E Y gt is U conversion D TypeK e TypeK ES x 2 O E 100000 E 9 O mu gt HS 18 gt 1O TE e w m5 1S G 18 v EE F gt e ae E s i E 8 re gt Approx O E ik x 110 C lt zoo 45 So 000 C 2 iol 1832 F so ae Temperature gt Sr 772 1480 Y lt 1100 1660 57 Input characteristics P Type J Type J F 6100 poo 4 11300 7 y delo cea nae an 11120 AS a a iO pu E paS a IS gt e 112 SS i z S53 L ka i gt as 1 1x D5 i iG iis Ao 52 5 I IO 19 1 tc Q 100 C L iZ G sE Sz aa 600 C Se HUF 3 po emperature Qo emperature 2 44000 Eu y 1480 _3 1100 7 s ZS Qe The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC 8 Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Ch
269. per version 8 13P or later supports scaling instruction SCL FNC259 e Ifthe input digital value for the D A conversion is out of the table data range specified by scaling instruction SCL FNC259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 D 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 1 PLC Version Number Check 6 Troubleshooting ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If analog data is not output or if the proper analog value is not output check the following items e Version number of PLC e Wiring e Special devices e Programs e Error status 6 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3Uc 32MT LT The version number should be 1 20 or later gt For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power 4DA ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of 4DA ADP is on 2 Analog output line Use the 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line In addition be sure to separate the analog output line from the other motive power lines or indu
270. prem Special A ia M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the thermocouple type R W Section relay between type K and type J 4 4 M8262 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to Unused Do not use i i M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Channel 1 temperature measurement D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 data R Channel 2 temperature measurement D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R data Section D8262 D8272 D8282 pgzg2 Channel 3 temperature measurement R 4 5 data Channel 4 temperature measurement D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 data R Number of averaging time for channel 1 T D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W ata _ register D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Number of averaging time for channel 2 R W Setting range 1 to 4095 Section Number of averaging time for channel 3 4 6 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W Number of averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W pd D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 10 R eres 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit The state of special auxiliary relays decides TC ADP s temperature unit as shown in the table below To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F 1 Example of program 1 To sw
271. q ton lt 0 t lt 0 lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is started gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during lt Limit cycle method gt 6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP Out of range from 0 to 32767 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O auto tuning S lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time started gt F TI Out of range from 0 to 32767 The auto tuning time is too long v Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and e lt Limit cycle method gt the lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller S 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the e TD Out of range from 0 to 32767 PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check whether oe the result is improved y Caution With regard to the measured value PV in PID normal measurement data should be read before PID Be operation begins eS Especially when the PID operation is executed to the input value in an analog input block pay attention to the conversion time G 29 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting
272. r PT ADP is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 1 Version number check method Check the D8001 special data register to determine the version number of the compatible PLC D8001 version number PC yee end E Version data Example Ver 1 00 PC type Example 24 FX2n FX3u FX2nc and FX3uc series 2 Description of production number A label is affixed to the right side of the product On this label check the number written in SERIAL to determine the date month and year of production Example FX3U 48MR ES production number 570001 MITSUBISHI ContRatreR MODEL FXsu 48MR ES 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS6 1 SERIAL 1 570001 us LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ C ae MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Month Example 7 July 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 5 2005 last digit of dominical year Le Control number 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for PT ADP of the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Software Versio
273. r memories refer to Section 5 4 and subsequent sections Slay UOLULOS gt BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference P T Ho Input mode setting for channels 1 thorough 4 2 H0000 at delivery Hexadeci Subsection 2s mal 5 4 1 S 1 Not used gt E g 3 2 Number of averaging time for channel 1 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal Unit times C 43 Number of averaging time for channel 2 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal Unit times Subsection sul ina ti 5 4 2 4 Number of averaging time for channel 3 1 to 4095 Ki Decimal T Unit times E EER gt 45 Number of averaging time for channel 4 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal g Unit times 6 Channel 1 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal D 7 Channel 2 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal Subsection yl wo 8 Channel 3 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal 5 4 3 E J 9 Channel 4 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal a 10 Channel 1 data E 7 Decimal v immediate data or average data E Channel 2 data F 11 Decimal immediate data or average data Subsection x Channel 3 data 5 4 4 E ce immediate data or average data a Decimal 5 53 413 Channel 4 data a a Decimal z immediate data or average data 14 to 18 Not used F Data change prohibit x Setting of the following buffer memories is E prohibited g Input mode specification BFM 0 To permit data 33 Initialization functi
274. rding abrupt change detection value setting G To use the abrupt change detection value be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 3 22 F De of 8 S B 39 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 18 BFM 99 Clearance of upper lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Three error data clearance commands lower limit error data clearance command upper limit error data clearance command and abrupt change detection data clearance command are respectively assigned to the 3 lower bits of BFM 99 Turning on each bit batch turning on for all the channels will reset the corresponding error status flag 26 or 27 of BFM Command assignment to each bit of BFM 99 Bit No Description Buffer memory to be cleared bO Lower limit error data clearance command BFM 26 b1 Upper limit error data clearance command b2 Abrupt change detection data clearance command BFM 27 b3 to b15 Not used Two or more data clearance commands can be turned on at the same time Operation to be performed after resetting BFM 26 27 Each bit will automatically be turned off 5 4 19 BFM 101 to 104 Minimum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Maximum peak value Numeric data type Decimal K The minimum value of channel
275. re sensor e Signal converter etc Analog output e Inverter etc Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple e Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration gt Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The analog special function blocks for the FX2N and FXoN shown in the following table can be connected to the FX3u Series PLC FX Series Type Analog special function blocks for FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A the FX2N FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC Analog special function blocks for the FXON ANO A 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common ltems 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC 3 2 FX3uc Series PLC sua UOWWOD 3 2 1 Connection of special adapters FX3uc Series To connect the special function blocks Jor the conversion adapters By refer to the next page Al El and represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual attached to your PLC dvr onexs WW Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Analog input eFlowmeter ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc European terminal block
276. riation and output variation can be checked arbitrarily El The check result can be seen in 24 2 gt For the operation of upper lower limit alarm output for the input and output values refer to Subsection 3 2 8 B Input variation 1 bit 1 When using the input variation alarm it is necessary to set to ON the following bits and set the values to be E checked 5 Set item Setting setting range Operation setting i O ON Used ACT 1 bit1 Input variation alarm OFF Not used Input variation 20 Input variation incremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 alarm set value 21 Input variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 Output variation 1 bit 2 When using the output variation alarm it is necessary to set the following bits to ON and set the values to be 1e avrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O checked Set item Setting setting range a ON Used Operation setting bit2 Output variation alarm OFF Not used ACT lt a bit5 Output value upper lower limit setting Make sure to set it to OFF Output variation 22 Output variation incremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 alarm set value 23 Output variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 Variation means Previous value Current value a is U 3 Upper and lower limits for output value CS3 1 bit 5 Setting range OFF Setting is not provided ON Setting is provided F The upper limit and lower limit of the output va
277. rror Status Check 22 ccc ciececeneceneveheceneuscdebesduedebeecteuebescueuebedoneusnecchegshecotedsnecctevehsdeneveneccueveedere D 22 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline E 3 11 Outline OF FUNCIONS e aes a ola e ce Bae eas E 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cccccccceeeecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees E 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number cccccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecaeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseneeess E 5 1 4 Version Number of Compatible Programming Tool cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeseneeees E 5 2 Specifications E 6 2 1 Generic Specifications ii A a a a a a E e a a cates E 6 2 2 Power Supply SpecificatiONS cooooooooccocnccconocoooncnnnccnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns E 7 2 3 Performance Specifications cccccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeecaaeeeeeseeeessseeeeseneeees E 7 2 4 AID Conversion Time sinsin a ae i a a a e e aae aiea aaia E 8 2 5 Temperature Measurement nn nn RR Ennan nannan nanenane E 8 3 Wiring E 9 3 11 Terminal Layout iodo tired triada E 10 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque oooocccconnccccnnncccccononccnnonnoncnnnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnnnnnns E 11 3 3 Power Supply MO a eo de e
278. rror status Check that no error is detected on PT ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 E 21 ddv var nexs J ddv avr nexs O 1d dWy NeXW day dav O Sian TT uononsul did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check 5 5 Check the following items for a program Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared the b6 and the b7 should be turned off using the program Check of storage devices Check that different digital values are not stored in the same device in the other programs Error Status Check If an error occurs on PT ADP the corresponding bit will be turned on Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data in bO channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Number of averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data in b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data in b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detecte
279. rted digital value 400 D51 i FNC 12 Start coordinate start point data i D52 point Y Digital output value of changed D52 coordinate X axis value start point i X A D converted digital value end FNC 12 K2000 D53 End coordinate point data 2000 D53 E MOV i point y FNC 12 K10000 D54 NA 1000 054 Digital output value of changed coordinate X axis value end point 10000 D54 AEE EEA E A oe oen seein ese anne A AEA AA LIE A AA AA ELIE AA ee i on mes el M8000 3 Bo 4 i i FNC 259 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored in C 20 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 3 Cautions regarding programming e GX Developer version 8 13P or later supports scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 Ifthe A D converted digital value is out of the table data range specified by scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt IM aav varnxs O aav ave nexs dav day vononasu aid G aravrnoa TI leavened 88 ON4 C 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 1 PLC Version Number Check 6 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status
280. s FXsu 4AD PT ADP O POWER Signal Application gt a External power t O L Ground terminal 5 O Li Channel 1 platinum 2 O L1 resistance thermometer O 11 sensor input gt z L2 Channel 2 platinum L2 resistance thermometer JO 12 sensor input 4 O L3 Channel 3 platinum 2 O L3 resistance thermometer sl O 13 sensor input 3 O L4 Channel 4 platinum O L4 resistance thermometer AO i4 sensor input E 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 8 3 o Use the power cable having a conductor s of size AWG22 to 20 To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum E resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable B 1 Cable a gt x lt Applicable cable and tightening torque 5 E Wire size Tightening ee 5 stranded single wire torque germination 0 3mm to 0 5mm To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off Single wire AWG22 to 20 the cable and then twist the core before C connection Y 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 To connect a single wire cable just peel the E cover off the cable before connection E 0 22 Nem to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve S 0 3mm to 0 5mm2 0 25 Nem recommended t
281. s OD aav ave nexs O dav dav O Sion TI uononasu did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 5 FX2N 8AD Specifications FX2N 8AD Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 8ch Thermocouple type K J and T Inputsignal JIS C 1602 1995 Type K Type K 100 C to 1200 C 148 F to 2192 F e Type J Type J Rated temperature range 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F TypeT e TypeT 100 C to 350 C 148 F to 662 F Type K Type K 1000 to 12000 1480 to 21920 A Type J Type J Digiraloutput 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 e TypeT e TypeT 1000 to 3500 1480 to 6620 Resolution 0 1 C 0 1 F gt Type K Type K g 0 5 6 5 C for full scale 0 5 11 7 F for full scale 8 Ambienttemperature Type J Type J 0 to 55 C 0 5 3 5 C for full scale 0 5 6 3 F for full scale 5 Type T Type T 6 0 7 3 15 C for full scale 0 7 5 67 F for full scale Time required for conversion 40msxnumber of selected channels Input characteristics 1200 C 21920 Type K 11120 Type J H 6620 i Type T 1112 F 148 F Type J e 0 2192 F Type K Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog i
282. s to the J type terminals Leave these terminals disconnected 2 Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise commercial power etc F 13 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt IM aavvarnex O aav ave nexs O Ld QYY NEX4 day L AvYY NEXA av d uononasu ala G 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring 3 5 2 Wiring of thermocouple type J Terminal block Thermocouple Compensating type J lead wire grounding LOs LO chO Orepresents the channel number 1 To use thermocouple type J be sure to connect the thermocouple to these terminals In addition select type J by turning on the type K J selection special auxiliary relay 2 Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise commercial power etc 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring e Itis not possible to connect different types of thermocouples to 4 channels of TC ADP Be sure to use the same type of thermocouple for all the channels TC ADP is not insulated between the channels For this reason be sure to use the insulation type thermocouples Be sure not to connect to the terminal e 3 7 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e The grounding resistance should be 1004 or less
283. scription Data type Data register number storing the target value SV Binary 16 bit Data register number storing the measured value PV Binary 16 bit Data register number storing a parameter Binary 16 bit CD Data register number storing the output value MV Binary 16 bit 3 Target devices Bit devices Word devices Others i Real Char Operand System User Digit Specification System User eg Index ee Num acter ps e type stant ber String ER X Y M T C S DO b KKnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R UDIG V2 AE El P viv AE al az daie 2 1 Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation PID When the target value S1 measured value and parameters to S3 6 are set and a program is executed the operation result MV is transferred to the output value CD gt at every sampling time specified by Command input FNC 88 A Target Measured Parameter Output value value value SV PV MV G 5 ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt day la avt nexa FT aav varnexa O aav ave nexs O TI gt So d 88 ONS L AvYY NEXA uononasu did FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 2 How to Use PID Instruction 2 2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning Explanation of set items 2 2 Set item Description
284. se this function to automatically transfer the over scale status data BFM 28 to the data register specified in BFM 128 Only when over scale is detected data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the over scale status data BFM 28 refer to Subsection 5 4 11 If BFM 128 K210 initial value Specified data register Description D210 Over scale status data in BFM 28 Caution regarding over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify such a data register e Be sure to turn on the over scale status data automatic transfer function b7 of BFM 22 The data set in BFM 128 will be retained in the EEPROM Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 5 4 25 BFM 129 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K211 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data BFM 29 to the data register specified in BFM
285. sed B 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 1 Terminal Arrangement 3 1 Terminal Arrangement The terminals of 4AD are arranged as follows Signal Application Channel 1 analog input Channel 2 analog input SESAINISSSSSIS Do not connect any lines Channel 3 analog input Channel 4 analog input inal E Ground termina HKS lt YKGC HSS GPs Slay UOWUWUOD gt dvr onexs dav taave nexs FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O dav O Sian TI uononasu did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 Wiring 3 2 Power Supply Line 3 2 Power Supply Line 3 2 1 Connection of power cable to power connector The power crossover cable type C shown in the following table is supplied with 4AD To connect the power cable refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit There are 3 types of power cables as shown in the following table Types A and B are supplied with the main unit and type C is supplied with the input extension blocks or the special function blocks for FX3uc Series Type Application Model Length Cable supplied with A Power cable for main unit FX2NC 100MPCB EN input Setor input j FX3uc Series PLC main unit nput power cable for inpu m B extension block FX2NG100BPEB 3 3 Input
286. separate the analog input line from the other motive power lines or inductive lines 3 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to short circuit the line between the VL terminal and the I terminal Q channel number of the channel Without short circuiting it is impossible to obtain the correctly converted digital values gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 4 8 3 Program Check Check the program as follows 1 Storage devices Check whether the device holding digital values contains any values written by other programs 2 Setting of number of averaging time and digital filter function Check if the number of averaging time or the digital filter function is set for the same channel It is not possible to set both functions for the same channel B 57 sw UOLULOS gt dvr onexs dav taavenexs FTI dav varnexy O aav avr nexs O dav O Sian TI uoHONSsUl did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 4 Error Status Check 8 4 Error Status Check If an error occurs in 4AD the corresponding bit of BFM 29 error status buffer memory will be turned on To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below Bit No Items Bit No Items bO Error detection b8 Data setting error detection b1
287. setting stoppage Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H The data history resetting function or data history stoppage function is assigned to each bit of BFM 199 1 Data history resetting function b0 to b3 The sampled history data can be reset for each channel Turn on a bit to reset all the history data 1st to 1 700th of the corresponding channel Note that two or more bits can be turned on at a time At the completion of data resetting the turned on bit will automatically be turned off 2 Data history stoppage function b8 to b11 Data sampling can be temporarily stopped for each channel Turn on a bit to temporarily stop sampling of history data for the corresponding channel Note that two or more bits can be turned on at a time Turn off the bit to restart sampling of history data 3 Function assignment to each bit of BFM 199 Bit No Channel number Description bO ch1 b1 ch2 Data history resetting function b2 ch3 b3 ch4 b4 to b7 Not used b8 ch1 b9 ch2 f b10 ha Data history stoppage function b11 ch4 b12 to b15 Not used 4 Caution regarding data history resetting When a bit is turned on the corresponding data history will be reset B 46 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 29 BFM 200 to 6999 Data history Initial value KO Numeri
288. so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION D 1 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output D 2 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3U 4DA ADP referred to as 4DA ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions FX3U 4DA ADP is an analog special adapter Connect FX3u 4DA ADP to the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC to output the voltage current data of 4 channels 1 Up to 4 units of 4DA ADP can be connected to the PLC Including other analog special adapters 2 Either voltage output or current output can be specified for each channel 3 D A output is automatically by the special data register value in FX3u FX3UC Series PLCs Point and section to be 4 adapters maximum including other ec of connectable analog special adapters units i piers FX3u FX3uc Series PLC
289. stance of more than 100 mm 3 94 from the above when wiring Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not ground at the same point as high voltage lines Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt id ave nex4 FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs dav dav vononasu did G or avenexy TT 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of 4AD ADP are arranged as follows FXsu 4AD ADP O Power Application External power 24 24 Grounding terminal Channel 1 analog input Channel 2 analog input ES 3 3 8 Ss 2 3 8 s Channel 3 analog input Channel 4 analog input ooooo llooo0o00000
290. stem During the wiring work do not let cutting chips and wire chips enter ventilation slits Make sure to observe the precautions below in order to prevent any damage to a machine or any accident which might be caused by abnormal data written in the PLC due to the influence of noise Do not lay close or bundle with the main circuit high voltage power line or load line Otherwise effects of noise or surge induction are likely to take place Keep a safe distance of more than 100 mm 3 94 from the above when wiring Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not ground at the same point as high voltage lines Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may iaavenexs FT dav varnexy O aav ave nexs O gt o d cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product Y The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem 3 Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires 353 Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed uononsul did 88 ON4 F 9 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog
291. t bit2 bit3 0 Output variation incremental is not exceeded 1 Output variation incremental is exceeded 0 Output variation decremental is not exceeded 1 Output variation decremental is exceeded on direction ACT b6 is set to ON Reference Subsection 3 2 2 Subsection 3 2 8 PV value threshold Set it according to measured value They are occupied when operation direction ACT bit 6 is ON limit cycle method 25 hysteresis width SHPV PV fluctuation Output value upper limit Set maximum value ULV of output C3 26 Lv value MV Output value lower limit Set minimum value LLV of output G3 27 iv value MV Wait setting from end of tuning C 3 28 cycle to start of PID control 50 to 32717 Kw 4 ACT of CS3 1 Chapter 4 CS 20 through 24 become occupied only if bits 1 2 or 5 are set to 1 to determine the action G 8 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 1 Sampling time Ts S3 Setting range 1 to 32767 ms Set the cycle time ms for the PID operation Inthe PID control Set the sampling time longer than the operation cycle of the PLC ave onexs OD sway uowuoo gt e Inthe auto tuning Set the sampling time to 1 000 ms 1 second or more 1 Maximum error The maximum err
292. t include the high speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter A D D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary 88 AID M8280 to M8289 Special data registers f D8280 to D8289 j O o Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 TE O E E E 14 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If PT ADP is connected special devices will be assigned as shown in the following table R Read W Write i Device number SPEGEL Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th f Section Special M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W 43 A M8261 to M8271 to M8281 to M8291 t rela 9 9 9 o E y M8269 m8279 m8289 m8299 Unused Do not use D8260 D8270 D8280 pa2go Channel 1 temperature R measurement data D8261 D82714 D8281 pe291 Channel 2 temperature R l measurement data Section E 4 4 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 temperature R measurement data D8263 D8273 D8283 pa293 Channel 4 temperature R measurement data Number of averaging time for ps Dozen Deets 19284 D8294 channel 1 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAY ata Number of averaging time for register E D8265 peers D9285 ae channel 2 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAW Secti
293. ted channels x Number of averaging time B 28 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Details of Buffer Memories 5 4 5 BFM 19 Data change prohibit Setting range K2080 or value other than K2080 Initial value at delivery K2080 Numeric data type Decimal K sla UOWUWUOD gt Setting of the following BFMs is prohibited Input mode specification BFM 0 e Initialization function BFM 20 v e Input characteristics writing BFM 21 q e Convenient functions BFM 22 5 e Offset data BFM 41 to 44 e Gain data BFM 51 to 54 3 e Automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 125 to 129 e Data history sampling time setting BFM 198 Set data in BFM 19 buffer memory for inhibition of data change as follows Set value Description K2080 Data change will be permitted Value other than K2080 Data change will be inhibited 1 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will be written in the EEPROM of 4AD For a detailed description of cautions regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 5 4 6 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O Setting range KO or K1 Initial value KO x Numeric data type Decimal K E gt O Use this function to initialize all
294. ters are connected E During execution of END instruction data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D A conversion and 8 then output in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter 33 TU 4 D A conversion speed data update time G During execution of END instruction the output setting digital data of 4 channels will be subject to D A conversion in 200us and analog data will be output 5 END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters A 28 Os g S FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 4 D A Conversion Time A 3 Wiring This chapter describes wiring of 4DA ADP Observe the following caution to wire 4DA ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock and damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal in the main unit Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical s
295. the data in BFM 0 through 6999 and to reset FX3UC 4AD to the factory gt I default status 5 Set value Description F KO Normal ES K1 Initializes all the data S Set K1 to initialize all the data At the completion of initialization KO will be set automatically go 1 Caution regarding initialization function setting G It takes approximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data v o 5 4 7 BFM 21 Input characteristics writing Be Of gs 00 Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Channel numbers are assigned to 4 lower bits of BFM 21 If one of these bits is turned on the offset data BFM 41 to 44 and the gain data BFM 51 to 54 of the corresponding channel will be written in the internal memory EEPROM When written in the internal memory the data will be valid 1 Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM 21 Bit No Description bO Channel 1 offset data BFM 41 and gain data BFM 51 writing b1 Channel 2 offset data BFM 42 and gain data BFM 52 writing b2 Channel 3 offset data BFM 43 and gain data BFM 53 writing b3 Channel 4 offset data BFM 44 and gain data BFM 54 writing b4 to b15 Not used The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time Set HOOOF to write data of all the channels in the EEPROM At the completion of writing H0000 b0 to b3 OFF will be set automatically B 29 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Contro
296. the hardware of FX3U 4DA FX3U 4DA ADP Supplied with USER S MANUAL JY997D14001 product ADP analog output special adapter such as specifications and installation This manual describes the hardware of FX2NC 4DA FX2NC 4DA JY997D07601 Supplied with analog output special function block such as USER S MANUAL product specifications and installation and also describes various programs EXoN 4DA Supplied with This manual describes the hardware of FX2N 4DA analog i JY992D65901 output special function block such as specifications and USER S GUIDE product installation and also describes various programs NDA Jy992074901 Supplied with cae do Bee ae ea USER S GUIDE product ae P Analog input output unit installation and also describes various programs This manual describes the hardware of FX2N 5A analog FX2N 5A Supplied with wet di USER S MANUAL JY997D11401 product input output special function block such as specifications and installation and also describes various programs acid Jy992D49001 Supplied with naa ea ba eet ies ae USER S GUIDE product Poe ees P and installation and also describes various programs FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 5 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment 5 2 Description of Related Manuals Supplied with Document product or are Manual type Uber separately Description supplied Temp
297. tion D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Bit Description bO Channel 1 output data setting error b1 Channel 2 output data setting error b2 Channel 3 output data setting error b3 Channel 4 output data setting error b4 EEPROM error b5 to b15 Unused 2 Example of program D8268 0 D8268 1 D8268 2 D8268 3 D8268 4 Channel 1 output data setting error on 1st adapter Channel 2 output data setting error on 1st adapter Channel 3 output data setting error on 1st adapter Channel 4 output data setting error on 1st adapter EEPROM error on 1st adapter D 18 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code Initial value K2 Numeric data type Decimal K 1 Description of setting When 4DA ADP is connected model code 2 is stored in the special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Description D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Use the above special data registers to check whether 4DA ADP is connected or not 2 Example of program Checks the model code
298. tion of Type Korea ct F 17 4 5 Temperature Measurement coooccccccccococononcnnnnnnnnnonononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns F 17 4 6 Number of Averaging Time ccccccccccsseccceeeceseenseeeeceeesssssaeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeessaeeeeeesesseeees F 18 AMES A e ed ee Bey F 19 408 Model O Ode o et e a a el ood F 21 4 9 Example of Basic Program ccccccccccssssscccecessssssceececcessssseseeeeecessessnseausueeeceesssessnasseeeeeessnnseess F 21 5 Troubleshooting F 22 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 22 ccccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeesaneeeeseaaaeeeeescaeeeeeseeeeeteters F 22 5 2 Wiring CHECK a a ata F 22 5 3 Special Devic Check ui as F 22 A o A A O tee et ead ee a Se ee ee ee tea F 23 5 0 EMO status Check lt 2 erst ee eh ee elt es ees a ee as ee a ee F 23 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents PID Instruction FNC 88 1 Outline G 3 11 QuiliNe Of TUNCHON coito occ ill eae ph a ee dela clado Eta T G 3 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference cooooococcccnccccononononnnnnnncnnnnanonononos G 4 2 How to Use PID Instruction G 5 2 1 Explanation of function and operation cccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeesseeeesseeeeees G 5 2 2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto TUNiNQ oooooocccnccnccccnnnnooonnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnncnnn
299. tion of analog signal If the fluctuation of the analog signal input value is more than the set digital filter value the digital output value will follow the analog input value and the digital output value equal to the analog input value will be stored in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 gt Analog input value Digital output value The digital output value will follow the analog input value IM dav varnexs O aav ave nexs O Set digital filter value Set digital filter value Analog input value i Ic j i i o i i i dav id dVv Nex4 Converted into stabilized digital output value Fluctuation width Less than 10 times of sampling F gt Time The relation between the set value and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table Set value Operation Less than0 _ Disables the digital filter function A setting error will occur b11 of BFM 29 will be setto ON 3 0 Disables the digital filter function G 1 to 1600 Disables the digital filter function v 1601 or more Disables the digital filter function A setting error will occur b11 of BFM 29 will be set to ON a ae 1 Application If the measurement signal contains steep spike noise use the digital filter instead of the averaging function The digital filter produces more stabilized data results 2 Cautions regarding digital filter setting To use
300. tore the temperature data are shown in the following table Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified number of averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data gt For a detailed description of the number of averaging time refer to Section 4 6 Caution regarding temperature measurement The special data registers for temperature measurement data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool Example of program M8000 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 FNC 12 D8260 D100 MOV FNC 12 D8261 D101 MOV Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101 the D8260 or the D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or PID instruction Normally ON Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 E 16
301. tput Holding Function Cancellation Setting 44 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting This setting can select the setting to hold the analog data output or to output the offset data OV for voltage output mode 4mA for current output mode at stoppage of the PLC To cancel or set the output holding function use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Output holding function cancellation setting for channel 1 Output holding function cancellation OFF Holds the analog data output M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 setting for channel 2 just before stop of the PLC Output holding function cancellation ON Outputs the offset data at M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 ur for channel 3 stop of the PLC Output holding function cancellation M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 setting for channel 4 1 Example of program To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel create a sequence program as follows ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt dav avr nexs O gt 1 To set the output holding function for 2 To cancel the output holding function for E channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter 5 M8001 M8000 gt x M8264 5 3 Normally OFF Normally ON E 2s 4 5 Output Setting Data E O 53 Numeric data type Decimal K z 4DA ADP perf
302. tsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable
303. twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from the other motive power lines or inductive lines 2 If current input is selected be sure to short the line between the V terminal and the I terminal O Channel number 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1004 or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Another Another Another PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment Ls ee eae Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible C 13 ave onexs OD susy uowuoo gt day id ave nex4 ITI aav varnexa O aav avr nexa day O stavrnexy TI uononsul did 88 ONS FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog
304. ulation sleeve 0 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25Nem recommended terminal Rod terminal AWG22 to 20 Al 0 5 8WH with insulation Refer to the external view Manufactured by Phoenix Contact sleeve of rod terminal shown in the Caulking tool following figure 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate end of stranded single wire cable cannot protrude Do not solder plate the end of the cable Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires e To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Caulking tool Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX UD6 CRIMPFOX UD6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact Termination of cable end 3 Tool e To tighten terminals use a purchased small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure ahold bs Manufacturer Model straight Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 D 12 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line g
305. unction of the MELSEC F FX Series programmable controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Outline Precautions e This manual provides information for the use of the FX3u Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These eng
306. uononsul did 88 ON4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using PT ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD PT ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Outline of system eVersion number of compatible PLC eVersion number of compatible Refer to Chapter 2 programming tool Check of specifications Specifications eOperation environment Refer to the common ePerformance specifications pages elnput characteristics System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Wiring Wiring ePower supply line ePlatinum resistance thermometer Refer to Chapter 4 sensor line Programming _ Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs Refer to Chapter 3 If the error status data or the input digital value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting E 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Numbe
307. vice assignment refer to Subsection 4 2 Communi High speed FXau 4AD FX3u 4AD FXsu 4AD Soga FXau 4AD a TC ADP TC ADP TC ADP adapter TC ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 4th Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 AID o TN Special data registers D8260 to D8269 IM covvarnos O aav ave nexs O gt Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 2 et Special data registers E D8270 to D8279 3 Sequence j p program Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 a ecial data registers ES D8280 to D8289 TE gt Y Special auxiliary relays 3 3 M8290 to M8299 ecial data registers D8290 to D8299 O U 5 e The analog special adapter nearest the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the A next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on In this case however do not include the high Sia speed input output special adapter and the communication special adapter S S F 15 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If TC ADP is connected special devices will be assigned as shown in the following table R Read W Write i Device number PAET i d ah Description Attribute Refer to s n r M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W
308. vrnexa FT aav varnexs O aav ave nexs O conversion When the output mode is set to 0 When the output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 1 10V 4 ix 20MA9 D 5 IE gt a 8 3 2 Output characteristics 2000 0 E D gt T 3 lt S 5 Q v oa 4mA lt F ES 0 gt 1000 Digital input x E The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC 3 Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output a is Channels are not insulated from each other d Da cl Oe Oe etd 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC G points v U 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution Z 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1 aa 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V gs 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA A 21 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 4 FX2N 2DA FX2N 2DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 2ch Analog output range EDS palcos External load 2k to 1MQ External load 4000 or less If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 Offset 9 3 9 3 OV to 1V 4mA If the digital value is 40
309. w the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4DA ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Check of specifications Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring Refer to Chapter 4 Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Changing of output characteristics If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting _ Outline of system e Version number of compatible PLC e Version number of compatible programming tool Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications e Output characteristics System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Wiring e Power supply line e Analog output line Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Method of output characteristics change e How to use scaling instruction D 4 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number g 3 Oo 4DA ADP is compatible with the following PLC 3 Compatible PLC Date of production B FX3U Series PLC After May 2005 initial production v FX3uc Series PLC After April 2004 5 5 1 Version number check method C Check the D8001 special
310. ystem During the wiring work do not let cutting chips and wire chips enter ventilation slits Make sure to observe the precautions below in order to prevent any damage to a machine or any accident which might be caused by abnormal data written in the PLC due to the influence of noise Do not lay close or bundle with the main circuit high voltage power line or load line Otherwise effects of noise or surge induction are likely to take place Keep a safe distance of more than 100 mm 3 94 from the above when wiring Ground the shield wire or shield of a shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not ground at the same point as high voltage lines Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board Ignorance of the following items may cause electric shock short circuit disconnection or damage of the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed D 10 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 1 Terminal Layout 3

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

AN11027 Using the LPC1100 low power modes and wake  Terminal user guide BOQ  Method and apparatus for managing the use of an electronic lock for  User Guide  BC-TRV  Chapter 8: Variables  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file